Piping

User's Guide

Version 2011 R1 (9.1)

May 2012

DSHIP-PE-200025I
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2010. All Rights Reserved.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation
Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars
Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and
HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark,
and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
ComponentOne LLC 1991-2009, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of
Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma
company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
SmartMarine 3D Documentation Set .................................................................................................... 11
Documentation Comments ................................................................................................................... 15
SmartMarine 3D and Oracle ................................................................................................................. 17

What's New in Piping ................................................................................................................................ 19

Piping .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
Permission Groups and Routing ........................................................................................................... 24

Piping Workflow ........................................................................................................................................ 27

Piping Common Tasks .......................................................................................................................... 27
Create a Pipeline System ..................................................................................................................... 28
Create a Piping System ........................................................................................................................ 29
Piping in the Integrated Environment .................................................................................................... 29
Jacketed Piping ..................................................................................................................................... 33
Modeling Jacketed Piping .............................................................................................................. 33
Interference Checking .................................................................................................................... 43
Isometric Extraction ........................................................................................................................ 43
Orthographic Drawing Production .................................................................................................. 43

Route Pipe .................................................................................................................................................. 45

Create a new pipe run ........................................................................................................................... 56
Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run ................................................................................................ 57
Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors ....................................................................................... 57
Place components while routing pipes ................................................................................................. 58
Place splits while routing pipes ............................................................................................................. 59
Route a sloped pipe run ........................................................................................................................ 59
Route a multi-sloped pipe run ............................................................................................................... 60
Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location ................................................................................ 61
Route a pipe run at specified distance .................................................................................................. 61
Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction ............................................................................ 62
Route a branch at a specific angle........................................................................................................ 62
Route a pipe run with an offset ............................................................................................................. 63
Route a pipe from R3D nozzle .............................................................................................................. 63
Copy a pipe run ..................................................................................................................................... 64
Extend an existing pipe run ................................................................................................................... 64
Extend an existing arc pipe ................................................................................................................... 64
Merge pipe runs .................................................................................................................................... 64
Choose a working plane ....................................................................................................................... 66
Select pipe run settings ......................................................................................................................... 66
Change the flow direction of a pipe run ................................................................................................ 66
Convert turn feature to an arc ............................................................................................................... 67
Place a tee from a P&ID ....................................................................................................................... 67
Place a nozzle from a P&ID .................................................................................................................. 67
Correlate existing equipment for use in an integrated environment ..................................................... 68

Piping User's Guide 3

Contents

Correlate new equipment for use in an integrated environment ........................................................... 68

Update equipment for use in an integrated environment ...................................................................... 69
Manually correlate multiple SmartMarine 3D pipe runs/pipelines with a P&ID pipe
run/pipeline............................................................................................................................................ 69
Compare design basis with the model .................................................................................................. 70
New Pipe Run Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 70
Defaults Tab (Route Pipe Settings Dialog Box) ............................................................................. 76
Reference 3D Tab .......................................................................................................................... 76
Set Offset Reference Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 77
Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 78
Modify Slope Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 79
Select Pipe Run Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 79
Select System Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 80
Insulation Specification Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 80

Moving Pipe Features ............................................................................................................................... 81

Move a pipe run .................................................................................................................................... 84
Move a branch ...................................................................................................................................... 84
Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet .................................................................................................... 84
Move a pipe end.................................................................................................................................... 85
Move a straight pipe .............................................................................................................................. 85
Move a turn ........................................................................................................................................... 86

Editing Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 87

Edit pipeline properties ......................................................................................................................... 88
Edit pipe run properties ......................................................................................................................... 89
Edit branch properties ........................................................................................................................... 89
Edit straight pipe properties .................................................................................................................. 89
Edit turn feature properties ................................................................................................................... 89
Edit part properties ................................................................................................................................ 90

Deleting Features ...................................................................................................................................... 91

Delete a branch ..................................................................................................................................... 92
Delete a straight pipe ............................................................................................................................ 92
Delete a component .............................................................................................................................. 92
Delete a split ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Delete a turn.......................................................................................................................................... 93
Delete a pipe run ................................................................................................................................... 93
Delete a pipeline ................................................................................................................................... 93

Insert Split .................................................................................................................................................. 95

Insert a welded split .............................................................................................................................. 97
Insert a takedown joint .......................................................................................................................... 97
Insert multiple splits a specified distance apart .................................................................................... 98
Insert a feature break ............................................................................................................................ 98
Edit split properties ............................................................................................................................... 98
Edit weld properties .............................................................................................................................. 99
Move a split ........................................................................................................................................... 99
Move a feature break ............................................................................................................................ 99
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 99
General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................. 100

4 Piping User's Guide

 Contents

Insert Component .................................................................................................................................... 103

Insert a component ............................................................................................................................. 107
Insert a component on a curved pipe ................................................................................................. 107
Insert a component while routing ........................................................................................................ 108
Insert an instrument ............................................................................................................................ 108
Insert a piping specialty item............................................................................................................... 108
Insert a surface mounted component ................................................................................................. 109
Insert the default branch ..................................................................................................................... 109
Insert the default turn .......................................................................................................................... 109
Insert the default reducer .................................................................................................................... 110
Place a tee from a P&ID ..................................................................................................................... 110
Place an elbolet................................................................................................................................... 110
Select component settings .................................................................................................................. 111
Edit component properties .................................................................................................................. 111
Move a component ............................................................................................................................. 111
Rotate a component ............................................................................................................................ 112
Rotate a component on a nozzle ........................................................................................................ 112
Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................ 112
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box) .................................................. 112

Insert Tap.................................................................................................................................................. 117

Insert a tap .......................................................................................................................................... 119
Move a tap .......................................................................................................................................... 119
Rotate a tap......................................................................................................................................... 119
Edit tap properties ............................................................................................................................... 120
Delete a tap ......................................................................................................................................... 120
Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 120

Route Flex Pipe ........................................................................................................................................ 121

Route a flexible pipe ........................................................................................................................... 122
Route a flexible pipe from a P&ID run ................................................................................................ 122

Spooling ................................................................................................................................................... 123

Generate Spools ................................................................................................................................. 125
Create spools ............................................................................................................................... 125
Edit spool properties ..................................................................................................................... 125
Delete a spool ............................................................................................................................... 126
Spool Generation Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 126
Spool Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 129
Create Penetration Spools .................................................................................................................. 130
Create penetration spools ............................................................................................................ 130
Generate Penetration Spools Dialog Box..................................................................................... 130
Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 132
Check Manufacturability Command .................................................................................................... 133
Check objects for manufacturability ............................................................................................. 136

Sequence Objects ................................................................................................................................... 139

Sequence weld names in a pipeline ................................................................................................... 141
Sequence weld names in a pipe run ................................................................................................... 141
Sequence weld names in a spool ....................................................................................................... 141

Piping User's Guide 5

Contents

Sequence Weld Names in a WBS Item .............................................................................................. 141

Group Pipe Parts ..................................................................................................................................... 143

Grouping pipe parts by query and control points ................................................................................ 143
Grouping pipe parts by control points ................................................................................................. 144
Grouping pipe parts by query.............................................................................................................. 144
WBS Item Generation Dialog Box....................................................................................................... 145
Options Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 145
Log Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 146

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes ......................................................................................................... 149

Common Property Tabs ...................................................................................................................... 149
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 150
Connections Tab .......................................................................................................................... 151
Definition Tab ............................................................................................................................... 151
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 151
Occurrence Tab ............................................................................................................................ 152
Relationship Tab........................................................................................................................... 154
Connection Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 154
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 155
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 155
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 155
General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................. 155
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box..................................................................................................... 158
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 158
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 158
General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 159
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 163
General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 163
Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................... 166
General Tab (Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog Box) ............................................. 166
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 168
General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................. 169
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 172
General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 172
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 173
General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 173
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 174
Default Property Values Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ....................................... 174
Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 178
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box)............................................................ 178
Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 179
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) .................................................... 179
Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................. 180
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) ............................................... 180
Reference 3D Piping Component Properties Dialog Box ................................................................... 180
General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Component Properties Dialog Box) ..................................... 181
Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................... 182
General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties Dialog Box) ....................................... 182
Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................... 184
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) ......................................... 184

6 Piping User's Guide

 Contents

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 185

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 207

Piping User's Guide 7

Contents

8 Piping User's Guide

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the SmartMarine 3D Piping task and provides command
reference information and procedural instructions.

Piping User's Guide 9

Preface

10 Piping User's Guide

SmartMarine 3D Documentation Set
SmartMarine 3D documentation is available as Adobe PDF files. The content is the same as
online Help. To access these PDF documents, click Help > Printable Guides in the software.
The documentation set is divided into four categories:
 Administrative guides contain information about installing, configuring, customizing, and
troubleshooting SmartMarine 3D.
 User's guides provide command reference and how-to information for working in each
SmartMarine 3D task.
 Reference data guides define the reference data workbooks. Not all tasks have reference
data.
 ISOGEN guides

Administrative Guides
SmartMarine 3D Installation Guide - Provides instructions on installing and configuring the
software.
Project Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the databases, creating
permission groups, backing up and restoring project data, assigning access permissions to the
model, defining and managing locations for Global Workshare, and version migration.
SmartMarine 3D Global Workshare Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the software and
the databases to work in a workshare environment.
SmartMarine 3D Interference Checking Guide - Provides information on installing, configuring,
and using the interference detection service.
SmartMarine 3D Integration Reference Guide - Provides information about installing,
configuring, and using SmartMarine 3D in an integrated environment.
SmartMarine 3D Interpreting Human Piping Specifications - Provides information about how to
interpret human piping specifications so that you can create the corresponding piping
specification in the software.
SmartMarine 3D Export to PDMS - Provides information about how to export model data from
SmartMarine 3D to PDMS. Specific guidelines relating to best practices and known limitations of
the export functionality are also included.
SmartMarine 3D Point Cloud Reference - Provides information for referencing point cloud files
provided by point cloud vendors in SmartMarine 3D.
SmartMarine 3D Troubleshooting Guide - Provides information on how to resolve errors that you
may encounter in the software by documenting troubleshooting tips, error messages, and To Do
List messages.
SmartMarine 3D Plant Design System (PDS) Guide - Provides all information needed to use
PDS with SmartMarine 3D. Topics include referencing active PDS projects in SmartMarine 3D,
exporting PDS data and importing that data into SmartMarine 3D, and converting PDS reference
data to SmartMarine 3D reference data.
SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide - Provides information about custom
commands, naming rules, and symbol programming. This document is delivered, if you install
the Programming Resources, to the [Product Folder]\3D\Programming\Help folder.

User's Guides
Catalog User's Guide - Provides information about viewing, editing, and creating reference data
and select lists (codelists).

Piping User's Guide 11

Preface

Common User's Guide - Provides information about defining workspaces, manipulating views,
and running reports.
Compartmentation User's Guide - Provides instruction for placing volume objects such as
compartments and zones in the model.
Electrical User's Guide - Provides information about routing electrical cable, cableway, cable
tray, and conduit.
Equipment and Furnishings User's Guide - Provides information about placing equipment.
Geometry Analysis and Repair User's Guide - Provides instructions for importing and exporting
model data, checking the data against a defined set of requirements, and repairing the data.
Grids User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating coordinate systems, elevation grid
planes, vertical grid planes, radial cylinders, radial planes, grid arcs, and grid lines.
Hangers and Supports User's Guide - Provides instructions on placing piping, duct, and
cableway supports in the model.
Hole Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing, reviewing, and approving
holes in a structure.
HVAC User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing HVAC duct.
Molded Forms User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing hull, bulkheads, major openings,
stiffeners, and other major components of a ship's frame in the model.
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing
orthographic drawings.
Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing
piping isometric drawings.
Piping User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing pipe and placing valves, taps, and pipe
joints.
Planning User's Guide - Provides instructions about defining the assembly hierarchy (production
bill of material) by creating blocks, assemblies, and by specifying the assembly sequence.
Reports User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing spreadsheet reports.
Space Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing space objects such as
areas, zones, interference volumes, and drawing volumes in the model.
Structural Analysis User's Guide - Provides instructions for defining loads, load cases, load
combinations, and the importing and exporting of analytical data.
Structural Detailing User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating, detailing, and maintaining
the structural members of a Ship\Plant.
Structural Manufacturing User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating and maintaining
manufacturing objects such as templates, jigs, and margins.
Structure User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing structural members such as: beams,
columns, slabs, openings, stairs, ladders, equipment foundations, and handrails.
Systems and Specifications User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating systems and
selecting which specifications are available for each system type.

Reference Data Guides

SmartMarine 3D 2D Symbols User's Guide - Provides command reference information and
procedural instructions for creating 2D symbols used to represent collars, clips, profiles,
brackets, and other items.
SmartMarine 3D 2D Symbols Reference Data Guide - Provides information about the
two-dimensional symbols used in all tasks.

12 Piping User's Guide

 Preface

Compartmentation Reference Data Guide - Provides information about compartmentation

reference data.
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about reports reference
data.
Electrical Reference Data Guide - Provides information about electrical cable, cableway, cable
tray, and conduit reference data.
Electrical 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the cable tray and conduit 3D
symbols that are available.
Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide - Provides information about equipment
reference data.
Equipment 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the equipment, equipment
component, design shapes, and design aides 3D symbols that are available.
Hangers and Supports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about hangers and
supports reference data.
Hangers and Supports 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the hanger and
support 3D symbols that are available.
Hangers and Supports SmartPart Symbols Reference - Provides information about the hanger
and support SmartPart symbols that are available.
Hole Management Reference Data Guide - Provides information about hole reference data.
HVAC Reference Data Guide - Provides information about HVAC reference data.
HVAC 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the HVAC 3D symbols that are
available.
SmartMarine 3D Reference Data Guide - Provides instructions about the Bulkload utility,
codelists, and the reference data common to several disciplines.
Piping Reference Data Guide - Provides information about piping reference data including piping
specifications, piping specification rules, piping parts, and piping symbols.
Piping 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the piping 3D symbols that are
available.
Space Management Reference Data Guide - Provides information about space management
reference data.
Structure Reference Data Guide - Provides information about structural reference data.
Structure 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the stair, ladder, footings, and
equipment foundation 3D symbols that are available.
SmartMarine 3D Structural Reference Data Overview - Provides an overview of the
SmartMarine 3D structural reference data library.

ISOGEN Guides
Symbol Keys Reference Guide - Provides information about the symbol keys for isometric
drawings. This guide is from Alias, the makers of ISOGEN.

Piping User's Guide 13

Preface

14 Piping User's Guide

Documentation Comments
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
[email protected].
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer
https://crmweb.intergraph.com.

Piping User's Guide 15

Preface

16 Piping User's Guide

SmartMarine 3D and Oracle
SmartMarine 3D shares much of its functionality with Intergraph's plant design software,
SmartPlant 3D. Because of this shared functionality, you will see throughout the software
references and options pertaining to Oracle databases, which SmartPlant 3D supports but
SmartMarine 3D does not. Please remember that when using SmartMarine 3D, to always select
the SQL option when given a choice between Oracle and SQL.

Piping User's Guide 17

Preface

18 Piping User's Guide

What's New in Piping
The following changes have been made to the Piping task.
Version 2011 R1 (9.1)
 Enhanced support for manual correlation of SmartMarine 3D objects with design basis. A
P&ID pipeline can correlate with multiple SmartMarine 3D pipelines. A P&ID pipe run can
correlate with multiple SmartMarine 3D pipe runs. For more information, see Manually
Correlate Multiple SmartMarine 3D Pipe Runs/Pipelines with a P&ID Pipe Run/Pipeline (on
page 69). (P2 CP:112583)
 You can now approve property and topology mismatches if the discrepancies can be
ignored. The approved discrepancies are not reported in later data comparisons unless the
data being compared changes in either the piping model or in the P&ID Database. For more
information, see New Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 70). (P2 CP: 120540)
 Added steps on how to route from a R3D nozzle. Also updated New Pipe Run Dialog Box
with Reference 3D Tab. For more information, see Route a pipe from R3D nozzle (on page
63) and Reference 3D Tab (on page 76).

Piping User's Guide 19

What's New in Piping

20 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 1

Piping
The Piping task is used to model distributed pipelines in your model using a point-by-point
design method. Using the Piping task, you can create a fully rendered three-dimensional model
of the various pipelines in your model. You also can use this task to insert piping components,
instruments, and splits during design and then spool the pipe. You can start the Piping task by
clicking Tasks > Piping.
Modeling of pipelines is aided by the piping specification, which limits and sometimes
automatically selects piping parts. Within a particular design context or pipeline service, the
specification author makes decisions in advance relating to both allowed parts and requirements
for the parts that may be used in that service. Limiting the selection of parts through the use of a
piping specification helps the designer by eliminating the need to make decisions related to
applicability, cost, procurement, and safety of particular parts within particular pipeline services.
Part selection is further aided through the provision of rules regarding the usage of particular
types of parts in particular design situations. The piping specification contains a grouping of
piping materials classes that define the requirements, characteristics, and behavior of the piping
commodities for a specific service. For more information on the piping reference data and piping
specifications, see the Piping Reference Data Guide or the Catalog Help.
Before you start modeling, there are some relationships and concepts that you need to know.

Piping Systems
Piping systems are a way of organizing pipelines in your model. You can create piping systems
based on the area where the pipelines are located, by what the pipelines carry, by the piping
designer who models the pipelines, or by any other method that you choose. Piping systems are
just a way to group objects. You create piping systems in the Systems and Specifications task.

Pipelines
Pipelines are a way of organizing pipe runs in your model and are created in the Systems and
Specifications task. You are not restricted to piping systems when creating pipelines. You can
create pipelines under any previously created system. When you create a pipeline, you are
required to define a fluid requirement and a fluid type.

Piping User's Guide 21

Piping

Pipe Runs
A pipe run is a connected series of pipe features that normally have the same nominal piping
diameter (NPD) and flow direction, and are normally governed by the same pipe specification.
All pipe features belong to a pipe run. One or more pipe runs make up a pipeline.

Pipe Features
When you route a pipe run, you place features defining high-level design information as you go.
The software automatically selects the specific parts based on the pipe specification of the pipe
run. You may want to think of features as logical collections of parts driven by the pipe
specification. There are several basic features: straight, turn, branch, end, run change, split, and
along leg component.
Pipe specifications are defined in the piping reference data. You can create and
customize the pipe specifications to suit your needs. For more information on defining pipe
specifications, see Piping Reference Data Guide.

Pipe Parts
Parts are the physical components that compose a feature and are generally selected by the
software. For example, flanges, gaskets, and gate valve itself are parts composing the gate
valve feature. In special situations where the pipe specification does not select the part that you
want, you can override the part selection by explicitly selecting the part from the catalog. While

22 Piping User's Guide

 Piping

this part does not follow the pipe specification defined for the pipe run, the part still belongs to
only that pipe run.

Pipe Ports
Ports are the connection points on the pipe parts.

Connections
Connections define how the pipe ports connect to one another.
The Piping task has the following commands:
Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Editing Properties (on
page 87).
Route Pipe - Places pipe runs in the model. For more information, see Route Pipe (on page 45).
Insert Split - Places a welded split or a take-down joint in the selected pipe. For more
information, see Insert Split (on page 95).
Insert Component - Places valves, tees, and other in-line components in the selected pipe. For
more information, see Insert Component (on page 103).
Insert Tap - Places a tap in the selected component. For more information, see Insert Tap (on
page 117).
Generate Spools - Generates piping spools for the piping in the model. For more information,
see Generate Spools (on page 125).
Create Penetration Spools - Generates penetration spools for pipes that have penetration
plates placed in the model. For more information, see Create Penetration Spools (on page 130).
Sequence Objects - Renames the components of a pipeline or spool so that they are in a
sequential order. For more information, see Sequence Objects (on page 139).
Group Pipe Parts - Automatically creates, names, and assigns piping objects to a Work
Breakdown Structure (WBS) item. For more information, see Group Pipe Parts (on page 143).
Route Flex Pipe - Places flexible piping in the model. For more information, see Route Flex Pipe
(on page 121).
Check Manufacturability - Analyzes pipes in the current workspace and reports the objects that
will be difficult or impossible to manufacture. For more information, see Check Manufacturability.

Piping User's Guide 23

Piping

See Also
Deleting Features (on page 91)
Moving Pipe Features (on page 81)
Spooling (on page 123)

Permission Groups and Routing

Several users in different permission groups can work together when routing if you know how
the software handles the different situations. Starting in version 6.0, Piping fully supports
different users, with different sets of privileges, working on different runs such as when working
in a Global Workshare Configuration.
Prior to version 6.0, pipe route legs could be shared between pipe runs. In version 6.0 and later,
the software creates an Intermediate End Feature (IEF) at the end of a pipe run connected to
another pipe run and creates a logical connection between the two IEFs/runs. The legs stop at
the IEF and are no longer shared between pipe runs. You do not need to create a separate
permission group for the pipe run and for the features of the pipe run. Everything can now be in
the same permission group.

Assignment of Permission Groups

The first thing to know is how permission groups are assigned:
 Objects that you create directly are assigned to the active permission group.
 Objects created automatically by the software are assigned a permission group determined
by an internal set of rules. The permission group assigned is not necessarily the active
permission group. Examples of automatically placed objects include connections and a pipe
automatically inserted when two touching valves are separated.
 Parts generated by features are assigned the permission group of the parent feature.
Remember, however, that runs can be in a different permission group than its collective
features and parts.
 End features use the permission group of the run to which they belong.
 Connections use the permission group of the parts to which they are connected. If the
connection is between parts with different permission groups, then the permission group to
which the user has write access is used. If the connection is between an equipment nozzle
and a route part, the route part permission group is used for the connection.
 Piping connection objects (welds, bolt sets, gaskets, clamps) use the permission group of
the connection that generated it.

Systems and Permission Groups

A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you are
modifying the definition of the parent system. Therefore, you must have write access to the
parent system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system. For example, to create
a pipe run, you need write access to the parent pipeline. However, you do not need access to
the system to which the pipeline belongs.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission
groups at the host site. The sub- system requirement to have write access to its parent system
is not possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site, and the
parent system's permission group is created at the host site.
For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
called "Pipe Rack 100" and its controlling permission group in Houston. You assign user John,
who works in London, write access. During the workshare replication process, the "Pipe Rack
100" system and permission group is "duplicated" in London. In London, John can add columns,

24 Piping User's Guide

 Piping

beams, braces and whatever else he wants to the "Pipe Rack 100" system because John was
given write access to the system's permission group in Houston. John cannot delete or change
any of the properties of the "Pipe Rack 100" system in London because the host site, Houston,
owns it. He can only "add" objects to the system. If John were to travel to Houston and log on
there, he could delete or change any of the properties of the "Pipe Rack 100" system because
the Houston host site owns it.

Example Configuration A
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on the same run with exclusive access.
John is responsible for part of the run, and Peter is responsible for the other part of the run.
Neither John nor Peter should be able to modify the work of the other person. The administrator
should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create three different permission groups: PG-Run, PG-John, and PG-Peter. Both John and
Peter should have full control access to PG-Run. John should have full control access to
PG- John while Peter should have read-only access to PG- John. Peter should have full
control access to PG- Peter while John should have read-only access to PG- Peter.
The run should be created using the PG-Run permission group. When John works on his parts
of the run, he should use PG-John as the active permission group. When Peter works on his
parts of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission group. The two halves of the
run should connect at a component such as a valve (piping) or a union (electrical).
For example, John routes his part of the run, places a flange, and then places a gate valve.
Peter then places a flange manually connecting to the open port of the gate valve, and then
continues his part of the run.

Example Configuration B
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different but in-line connected runs
with exclusive access. For example, John places an elbow, a straight piece, and a union, then
stops. Peter connects to the open port of the union, and then continues routing. The
administrator should configure the permission groups as follows:
 Create two different permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter. John should have full
control access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access to PG-John. Similarly,
Peter should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access
to PG-Peter.
John should create the run using the PG-John permission group and route his part of the run.
When Peter works on his part of the run, he should use PG-Peter as the active permission
group. The Intermediate End Features will handle the connection between the two parts of the
run.

Example Configuration C
In this example, two users, John and Peter, are working on different runs connected by
branching components such as a tee. The administrator should configure the permission groups
as follows:
 Create two permission groups: PG-John and PG-Peter. John should have full control
access to PG-John while Peter should have read-only access to PG-John. Similarly, Peter
should have full control access to PG-Peter while John should have read-only access to
PG-Peter.
John creates an initial header run using PG-John as the active permission group and routes it
as needed. Peter now wants to branch from John's run. Peter sets PG-Peter as the active
permission group and selects the header in John's run from which to branch. Instead of creating
the header component (such as a tee), the software generates a To Do List item for John.

Piping User's Guide 25

Piping

When John updates the out-of-date To Do List item, the software modifies the header to add
the tee, and then generates a To Do List item for Peter.
When Peter updates his out-of-date To Do List item, the software fixes the branch leg (the end
of the branch leg is adjusted to the tee port). This is called a double hand-shaking mechanism.

26 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 2

Piping Workflow
All piping elements are placed in the model using information defined in the piping reference
data. Using the Catalog task or the reference data workbooks, you can create custom pipe
specifications, edit pipe specification rules, and define pipe parts and symbols. Your first step
should be to review, edit, and otherwise customize the delivered piping reference data. Refer to
the Piping Reference Data Guide or the Catalog Help for more information.
After the reference data is customized to suit your needs, you need to define piping systems and
pipelines in the Systems and Specifications task. You cannot place pipe runs in the model until
the pipelines are defined.
After the piping reference data and the needed systems are defined, you can begin placing pipe
in your model.
After pipe is in your model, the Piping task enables you to spool pipe into sections ready for
manufacturing. To create penetration spools, at least one penetration plate must exist in the
model. You can place penetration plates in the Hangers and Supports task.
See Also
Piping Common Tasks (on page 27)
Piping (on page 21)
Piping in the Integrated Environment (on page 29)

Piping Common Tasks

The following tasks are used frequently in the piping task.

Customize Reference Data

 Create custom pipe specifications.
 Define parts and symbols. For more information on creating symbols, see SmartMarine 3D
Symbols Reference Data Guide.

Create Needed Systems

 Create new pipe systems. For more information, see Create a piping system (on page 29).
 Create new pipelines. For more information, see Create a pipeline system (on page 28).

Route Pipe Runs

 Route new pipe runs in the pipelines that you defined. For more information, see Create a
new pipe run (on page 56).

Insert Splits, Components, and Taps

 Insert pipe splits in the pipe runs to create the needed spools lengths. You can insert splits
while routing the pipe runs or after the runs are in the model. For more information, see
Place splits while routing pipes (on page 59), Insert a takedown joint (on page 97), and
Insert a welded split (on page 97).

Piping User's Guide 27

Piping Workflow

 Insert valves, reducers, tees, and other components. You can insert components while
routing the pipe runs or after the runs are in the model. For more information, see Place
components while routing pipes (on page 58) and Insert a component (on page 107).
 Insert ports on components for venting, drainage, and for the connection of other
components such as instruments. For more information, see Insert a tap (on page 119).

Create Piping Spools

 Split the pipe into spools by using the Generate Spools or Create Penetration Spools
commands. For more information, see Create spools (on page 125) and Create penetration
spools (on page 130).

Create a Pipeline System

In the Systems and Specifications task:
1. Click Task > Systems and Specifications.
2. In the tree, select the system in which you want to create the pipeline system.
3. From the ribbon, select New Pipeline System .
4. Type a description for the pipeline system.
5. Specify a fluid requirement and fluid type for the pipeline.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the new pipeline system in the tree, and then right-click and select Properties.
8. Change any properties of the system as needed.
In the Piping task:
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select All in the Locate Filter.
3. In the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the parent to the pipeline system that you are
creating.
4. Click New System > New Pipeline on the pop-up menu.
5. Type a description for the pipeline system.
6. Specify a fluid requirement and fluid type for the pipeline.
7. Click OK.
8. Right-click on the new pipeline system in the Workspace Explorer, and then select
Properties.
9. Change any additional properties as needed.

28 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

Create a Piping System

In the Systems and Specifications task:
1. Click Task > Systems and Specifications.
2. In the tree, select the system in which you want to create the piping system.
3. From the ribbon, select New Piping System .
4. Select the new system in the tree, and then right-click and select Properties.
5. Change any properties of the system as needed.
In the Piping task:
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select All in the Locate Filter.
3. In the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the parent to the piping system that you are
creating.
4. Click New System > New Piping System on the pop-up menu.
5. Right-click on the new piping system in the Workspace Explorer, and then select
Properties.
6. Change any additional properties as needed.

Piping in the Integrated Environment

This section describes how to use the Piping task in a SmartPlant integrated environment. For
more information, refer to the SmartMarine 3D Integration Reference Guide available from the
Help > Printable Guides command.

Piping Catalog Data

SmartPlant P&ID and SmartMarine 3D must use the same naming convention for piping
components for proper correlation in an integrated environment. This is because the software
correlates based on the short code value published from SmartPlant P&ID to SmartMarine 3D.
An example of this would be to modify all pipe specification reducer components to reflect the
name "Concentric Reducer" instead of the default name "Concentric Size Change". You can
either edit the existing catalog spreadsheet entries or copy the existing entries and add new
entries as shown below. After making necessary modifications, bulkload the spreadsheet into
the Catalog.

Piping User's Guide 29

Piping Workflow

Correlating Pipe Runs

You can correlate existing pipe runs by:
1. Select SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
2. Select the pipe run in the model.
3. Select the P&ID that contains the pipe run, and then click Open.
4. Select the pipe run in the P&ID.
5. Review any data mismatch between the P&ID pipe run and the model pipe run. Fix the data
as appropriate.
6. Click Update.
Previously correlated pipe runs (displayed as green in the P&ID) that change color to red or
magenta in the P&ID on subsequent retrieval of a new revision of the P&ID data, needs to be
updated as follows:
1. Set the Locate Filter to Piping Runs.
2. Select the run in either the model or the P&ID.
3. Select SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis.
Any data item that has changed is highlighted in red.
4. Click Update.

 When you click Update, the in-line component is also updated if it is still a valid piping
component and if the component symbol still exists on the pipe run. If the symbol has been
deleted, you will need to delete this component.
 The in-line components placed with the use of dimensional data from SmartPlant
Instrumentation must be updated in a separate process.

Correlating Instruments
You can correlate existing instruments in the model by:
1. Select SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
2. Select the modeled instrument.
3. Select the P&ID that contains the instrument, and then click Open.
4. Select the instrument in the P&ID.
5. Review any data mismatches between the P&ID instrument and the modeled instrument. Fix
the data as appropriate.
6. Click Update.
You can place new correlated instruments using existing SmartMarine 3D Catalog instrument
components or using the automatic creation of the instrument from the dimensional data
supplied by SmartPlant Instrumentation.
To place standard Catalog instruments, you must manually match the instrument to place with
the type of instrument called-out in the P&ID:
1. Route the pipe run from the P&ID. For detailed steps, see Create a New Pipe Run from a
P&ID Run (on page 57).
2. Select SmartPlant > View P&ID.
3. Select the P&ID that contains the instrument to place, and then click Open.
4. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the area of the pipe run to place the instrument.
6. Select the component in the P&ID view.

30 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

7. In the Type option on the ribbon, select <Specify Component Tag>.

8. Select Browse instruments.
9. Select the proper instrument as indicated on the P&ID.
10. Position the instrument, and click Finish.
11. Open the properties for the instrument and size it appropriately for the pipe run.
To place instruments built on the fly from the dimensional data sheet data published from
SmartPlant Instrumentation, SmartMarine 3D reads the dimensional data sheet, applies those
values to the instrument in the background, and then places the instrument on the pipe feature.
When retrieving from a P&ID:
1. Route the pipe run from the P&ID. For detailed steps, see Create a New Pipe Run from a
P&ID Run (on page 57).
2. Select SmartPlant > View P&ID.
3. Select the P&ID that contains the instrument to place, and then click Open.
4. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the instrument in the P&ID.
6. Position the instrument on the pipe run, and then click Finish.
When retrieving directly from Dimensional Data Sheet information for instruments that do not
exist on a P&ID:
1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Type box on the ribbon, select Specify Component Tag.
3. Type in the component tag or browse the design basis.
4. If found, the software will create and correlate the component as it would if the component
were selected from a P&ID.
Only those instruments that were built from dimensional data sheets or have had a name
change require updating.
To update instruments built/placed from dimensional data sheets:
1. Retrieve the new DDP.
2. Select the instrument in the model.
3. Select SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis.
4. Any data item that has changed is highlighted in red.
5. Click Update.
In-line instruments placed from the catalog are automatically updated/re-validated when the
parent pipe run is updated. To update instruments placed from the catalog:
1. Set the Locate Filter to Piping Features.
2. Select the instrument feature in the model.
3. Select SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis.
4. Any data item that has changed is highlighted in red.
5. Click Update.

Off-Page Connectors
Off-page connectors (OPC) connect multi-page P&ID drawings. Unlike other P&ID elements, the
OPC is correlated when the two pipe runs are joined. The actual P&ID off-page connector
symbol is never selected or used for correlation. The main issue to know when correlating piping
with an OPC is that a weld is placed where the two pipe runs meet. Therefore, you should find a

Piping User's Guide 31

Piping Workflow

logical connection point for this weld in the model to avoid adding an additional unneeded weld.
To correlate a pipe run that is located on multiple drawings, you should:
1. Route normally off the first, find a logical stopping point (such as an elbow).
2. Route normally from the second P&ID.
3. Then connect the two runs by extending or routing the necessary run to the other. A weld is
placed between the two pipe segments (at the elbow or meeting point). This automatically
correlates the OPC.
For more detailed steps, see Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors (on page 57).

Topology Checker
The pipe run topology checker simply starts at one end of the pipeline and moves the end of the
line. There are some rules that you should be aware to make sure the topology checker is
running properly.
 Tees have the unique ability to belong to three different runs. For the purpose of topology
comparison, any piping component can be considered to be in two runs.
 A pipe run must be continuous for the topology to be properly checked. This means that no
component (tees included) can belong to a different run along that line. For example, if the
third component along a pipe run was a tee that belonged to the branch run, the topology
checker would not give proper results since the tee breaks the run. There are piping
components that are still members of that first run, but the run is not continuous (left image:
tee is not highlighted). After this tee is made a member of the original run, the topology
checker will give proper results (right image: tee is highlighted).

An easy check to make sure you do not have this issue is to:
1. Set the locate filter to Piping Runs.
2. Select each run. If the complete run highlights everything is ok. If one or more components
do not highlight, the topology checker is probably not returning true results.
To change a piping component to another run:
1. Set the locate filter to Piping Features.
2. Select the component.
3. Change the system to which that component is a member.
See Also
Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run (on page 57)
Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors (on page 57)

32 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

Jacketed Piping
This section describes the methods and procedures to model and extract jacketed piping
systems. All aspects of jacketed piping can be accomplished using the current version of
SmartMarine 3D. There are currently no specific tools to model jacketed piping as one pipeline
or to perform the routing of both internal and external piping in a single step. However, there are
enough capabilities within the product and in the notation capabilities within the ISOGEN
interface which makes it possible to create all the model graphics and necessary drawings to
satisfy material requirements and to communicate fabrication and erection requirements through
standard SmartMarine 3D drawing output. This method, referred to hereafter as Redundant
Modeling, requires that piping materials are placed in the SmartMarine 3D model for both the
external and internal portions of the jacket piping system.

Redundant Modeling
Redundant modeling is a method where internal piping (the core) is contained in one pipeline,
and the external piping (the jacket) is overlaid on the internal piping in a separate jacket pipeline.
This allows for the independent extraction of internal and external piping materials, using
ISOGEN, without any problems with overlapping segments. For example, if piping area 01 has
the requirement for jacket piping systems, then create an associated pipeline to contain the
external piping. Redundant modeling is the best way to handle jacket piping systems when the
contractor's scope includes detailed fabrication drawings, isometric drawings, material
procurement, and precise configuration depiction.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)
Interference Checking (on page 43)
Isometric Extraction (on page 43)
Orthographic Drawing Production (on page 43)

Modeling Jacketed Piping

Modeling jacketed piping is a multi-step process.
Creating Jacketed Pipelines (on page 34)
Placing the Core Pipe and Components (on page 37)
Placing the Jacket Pipe and Components (on page 38)
Pipe Supports (on page 42)
Defining Isometric Remarks (on page 42)
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)
Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Piping User's Guide 33

Piping Workflow

Creating Jacketed Pipelines

This section provides recommendations for setting up jacketed pipelines. This is just an example
to convey one method. Your specific contract standards and requirements may dictate a
different method than what is recommended here.
For jacketed piping, we recommend that you create a different piping system for each
jacketed pipeline. In the example figure, the jacketed piping system is located in Area-1-0201
and is named "Process Line-1-0201". Then under the piping system, create two pipelines ,
one pipeline for the core (named Area-1-02010000-P) and one pipeline for the jacket (named
Area-1-02010000-S). The individual pipe runs and pipe parts will then appear under the
corresponding pipelines for the core and jacket.

You need to create separate pipelines for the core and jacket for several reasons:
 The core and jacket pipelines have different fluid requirements. This is a property on the
pipeline object so two pipelines are needed for the two fluid requirements.
 Creates unique pipeline ID's for isometric drawings to prevent confusion between the core
and jacket isometric drawings.

34 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

Creating the Jacketed Piping System

1. Switch to the Systems and Specifications task.
2. Select the parent system for the jacketed piping system. In our example, the parent system
is Area-1-201.
3. Select New Piping System on the ribbon.
4. Edit the name of the jacketed piping system if needed.

Creating the Core Pipeline

1. Switch to the Systems and Specifications task if you are not already there.
2. Select the jacketed piping system in the tree view.
3. Select New Pipeline System on the ribbon.
4. In the New Pipeline dialog box, enter the core description, sequence number, fluid
requirement, and fluid type.

Creating the Jacket Pipeline

1. Switch to the Systems and Specifications task if you are not already there.
2. Select the jacketed piping system in the tree view.
3. Select New Pipeline System on the ribbon.
4. In the New Pipeline dialog box, enter the jacket description, sequence number, fluid
requirement, and fluid type.

Creating Core Pipe Runs

In addition to selecting the piping specification, nominal diameter, and temperature and pressure
settings, follow these steps when creating the core pipe runs using the New Pipe Run dialog
box while in the Piping task.
1. In the Standard category:
a. Select the core pipeline in the Pipeline box.
2. In the Category option, select Insulation and Tracing.
a. In the Heat Tracing Requirement box, select Heat Traced.
b. In the Heat Tracing Type box, select Jacketed Heat Tracing.
c. In the Heat Tracing Medium box, select the medium in the jacket. This should match
the fluid requirement and fluid type defined for the jacket pipeline.
d. In the Heat Tracing Medium Temperature box, enter the medium temperature.

Piping User's Guide 35

Piping Workflow

e. Verify that Insulation Specification is set to Not Insulated.

Creating Jacket Pipe Runs

In addition to selecting the piping specification, nominal diameter, and temperature and pressure
settings, follow these steps when creating the jacket pipe runs using the New Pipe Run dialog
box while in the Piping task.
1. In the Standard category:
a. Select the jacket pipeline in the Pipeline box.
2. In the Category option, select Insulation and Tracing.
a. Verify that Insulation Specification is set to your insulation of choice, such as
Fiberglass.
b. In the Insulation Thickness and Insulation Temperature boxes, enter appropriate
values.
c. In the Heat Tracing Requirement box, select Not Heat Traced.

36 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Placing the Core Pipe and Components

You should model the core pipeline first and in such a way that the pipeline is contiguous,
containing all in-line items, including: valves, flanges, instruments, connections to equipment,
and so forth. Use the standard pipe routing procedures just as you would to route a
non-jacketed pipeline. For more information about the routing pipe in general, see Route Pipe
(on page 45).
We do recommend that you place reducers using the origin as the reference position. The origin
reference position makes precision placement of the corresponding jacket reducer easier when
you route the jacket.
To illustrate this concept, core verses jacket modeling, refer to the following figure. A section of
a jacket piping system's core piping is shown on the left. The jacket pipe overlaid on top of the
internal piping is shown on the right. The configuration was designed to illustrate the most
common details of a jacketed piping system. It is not inclusive of all situations nor is it intended
to represent a realistic piping configuration. This was the best way to compact many details in a
small space for illustration.

Core Piping (left) Jacket Piping Overlay (right)

Piping User's Guide 37

Piping Workflow

Placing all connections and in-line components with the internal core piping reduces the number
of disconnected sections, produces better isometric drawings, and minimizes the external
modeling requirements.
The valves that are used will probably be specific to the jacket piping specification and will have
to be defined in the piping commodity specification like any other valve. Generally, this requires
dimension tables specific to the valve being purchased, inclusive of the jacket. If a standard
valve is being used and a bolt-on jacket is being applied, then the implied item feature of the
piping commodity specification should be used to account for that jacket item. Consideration
should be given to interference detection when the implied method is being used. Possibly
provide a special dimension table based on a user defined geometric industry standard to allow
for the spatial requirements of valve and jacket.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Placing the Jacket Pipe and Components

The jacket pipe and components are placed in the jacket pipeline on top of the core pipeline
using key locations of core pipe and components as placement aids. The placement of pipe and
components in the jacket pipeline can be awkward because you are placing them sometimes at
unnatural connect locations. The easiest method for modeling the jacket pipeline is to start at
one end of core pipeline and work towards the other end. Be sure to use the Tools > Point
Along and Tools > PinPoint commands to help with the exact placement of the jacket pipe and
components.
When routing the jacket pipes and components, be very careful not to select any of
the core pipe or components as a route end point. If you do, you will create a branch between
the core and the jacket pipe runs. This branch will be sent to the To Do List because the branch
run (the jacket) will be larger than the header run (the core).
One way to model the jacket piping system is shown below (using a transparent view style). The
jacket pipe is welded to the back of the core flange.

When placing jacket pipe to the back of a core flange, there are two placement methods you can
use: Point Along or the Edge on solids.
The Tools > Point Along placement method works best when starting routing at an end flange
or possibly a nozzle.
1. Determine the flange thickness by setting the Locate Filter to Piping Parts, selecting the
flange in question, and then reviewing the flange properties . Make a note of this
thickness as you will need it in step 6.
2. Click Tools > Point Along.

38 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

3. Select the core pipeline as the reference object.

4. Set the reference point to measure from at the end of the core pipe run (at the face of the
flange).

5. Start the Route Pipe command.

6. In the Distance box on the Point Along ribbon, enter the thickness of the flange from step
1.
7. Click to indicate that the Point Along distance is your starting point. Note that the beginning
of the jacket pipe is aligned with the inside flange face.

8. Route the jacket pipe as usual.

The Edge on solids SmartSketch method works well when routing between mated flanges or
between mated flanges and an inline component such as a valve.
1. Click Tools > Options.
2. Select the SmartSketch tab.
3. Verify that the Edge on solids option is selected, and then select OK.
4. Start the Route Pipe command.

5. Select the starting location of the jacketed pipe. Make sure that only the Projection 3D
SmartSketch glyph appears when you click otherwise you may accidentally connect to the
core piping.

Piping User's Guide 39

Piping Workflow

6. Select the ending location of the jacketed pipe. Again, make sure that only the Projection
3D glyph appears.

You may want to use the Tools > Add to SmartSketch List command to restrict the
available SmartSketch relationships to just Projection 3D.
Another way to model jacket piping is to terminate the jacket prior to the flange or valve with a
reducer as shown below. In either case, the details dictated by the jacket system should be
followed.

Jump over piping at core pipe flanges is placed in the jacket pipeline as branch points. The
heating medium inlet to the jacket and a jump over at a flanged connection are shown below.
The jacket and jump over piping are in the jacket pipeline.

40 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

Jump over connections at valves can be modeled by terminating the jump over connection in
space at the desired locations on the valve. As an alternative, you can use the Place Tap
command to tap the valve.

As shown in this figure, the remarks field of the terminator, cap or 'end' may be used to note the
connection. Also, use the remarks field of the internal valve to refer to the jump-over connection,
thereby completing the cross reference between the two isometrics.

See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Piping User's Guide 41

Piping Workflow

Pipe Supports
Pipe supports serve two purposes in a jacketed system:
 Locating spacer or restraint details between the internal and external piping.
 The normal support attachments for the jacket piping, for example: shoes, anchors, dummy
legs, and so forth, are placed and extracted with external piping.

Normal Supports
Use the Hangers and Supports task to place supports and hangers on the jacket pipeline just as
you would a standard pipeline. Be careful when placing the supports that you only select the
jacket pipeline. Otherwise the support will connect to the core pipeline and cause interference
between the support and the jacket pipeline. For more information about placing hangers and
support, see the Hangers and Supports Help or the Hangers and Supports User's Guide
available from the Help > Printable Guides command.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Defining Isometric Remarks

Use remarks to cross reference attachment points between the core and jacket piping on the
isometric.

You can place remarks by setting the Locate Filter to Piping Parts, selecting the part that you
want to remark, and then selecting Insert > Note. You can also use the Notes tab on the part's
property dialog box.
In some cases you can use the component number to trigger a special detail on the isometric
drawing. For example, if there is more than one way to close the end of a jacket pipe, the end
component can carry a component number of CL-1, CL-2, CL-3, and so forth. This in turn can
trigger the correct detail for the corresponding closure type to the isometric drawing.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

42 Piping User's Guide

 Piping Workflow

Interference Checking
The interference checking service may find many false clashes between the jacket and core.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)
Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Isometric Extraction
We recommend that you use the same ISOGEN options for both internal and external
extractions. This method reduces the risk of inconsistent isometric settings between the two
extractions. If you make the line ID unique by adding a 'J' suffix to the line sequence number,
then this will be enough to separate the two parts of the jacket system using the same line ID
format. However, when the project dictates that the two lines, internal and external, are of
different line ID formats, separate ISOGEN options files, identified by separate Intergraph
default sets should be used.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)
Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Orthographic Drawing Production

There are no special requirements for orthographic drawing with the exception of the vector
hidden line settings. If it is desired to show the internal pipe as dotted inside of the jacket pipe,
then setting the 'Visible Only'/'Visible and Hidden' toggle to 'Visible and Hidden', and the
'Cleanup' option to 'On', will provide the desired results. Any special labeling requirements are
best defined by the user and can be set up as normal to meet their needs.
See Also
Modeling Jacketed Piping (on page 33)
Jacketed Piping (on page 33)

Piping User's Guide 43

Piping Workflow

44 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 3

Route Pipe
Creates, models, and extends pipe runs quickly and precisely. Pipe runs may be straight or
circular, and, in general, behave the same way. All pipe run features and components are driven
by constraints, piping specifications, and catalogs.

By default, the software uses fast mode to dynamically display a pipe run as you define the
route. When in fast mode, the software does not render elbows or turns during the dynamic
display; instead, the software displays the elbows and turns after you define the pipe run
location. You cannot route a non-radial branch while in fast mode. Press SHIFT+F to turn off fast
mode.
The Route Pipe command also works with the Insert Split and Insert Component
commands to add features while routing. After placing the feature, such as a gate valve, the
route command automatically restarts from the open port of the inserted feature. Route Pipe
also uses the concept of routing on a plane to enable the quick, precise creation of pipe runs.
The Route Pipe command supports the following:
 Routing using an existing pipe run
 Routing using a newly created pipe run
 Routing using a pipe run defined in the P&ID design basis (if P&ID design basis data is
available)
 Routing to and from an end feature
 Routing to and from an equipment nozzle
 Routing to and from a straight feature (creating a branch)
 Inserting a component while routing
 Inserting a split while routing
When routing any pipe run, the major steps include selecting a starting point, defining the
characteristics of the run (nominal pipe diameter, piping specification, options), routing the run
point-by-point, and selecting the end point of the run. To route an arc pipe run, you include a
center point, as well.

Piping User's Guide 45

Route Pipe

Routing a Circular or Arc Pipe

You use the Route Pipe command ribbon to model arc pipes, such as might be needed in gas
turbines or in the nuclear industry for carrying fluids. You can place a circular ring or route out of
bends using branch fittings, components or stub-ins.
When the curve leg and normal leg connect, Route Pipe places a new zero-angle turn called a
connector. The curve leg can hold all the route pipe features except straight and end legs. If the
curve leg is a full ring, then it can only have curve and along leg features on the leg.

A curve leg with a single curve feature may be placed, but it is not logged in the To-Do list. You
will need to manually insert the split point.

Routing To or From a Straight Feature, End Feature, or Nozzle

In addition to the basic functions of creating new runs or extending previous runs, the Route
Pipe command supports routing to or from straight features, end features, and nozzles.
When routing a pipe run, you can define the run starting point either before or after clicking the
Route Pipe command. In either case, if a feature was selected, the command determines the
default working plane based on that feature. Additionally, the command determines whether to
continue the pipe run associated with that feature or to create a new run. The software
automatically generates any parts required for the connection, including branch components.
This functionality allows you to easily extend or branch out of a previously modeled pipe run.

Preventing Skewed, Non-Square, and Non- Plumb Piping

Occasionally, you might accidentally model piping that is slightly askew, out of plumb, or not
square and not notice the error. If you continue routing, it results in the propagation of the
original error to other runs. To help you avoid this problem, the software performs these checks:
 Major Axis Check - The software checks if newly created legs or modified legs are slightly
off alignment of a major coordinate system axis. For non-sloped pipes, the software displays
a message if the leg is between 0.05° and 3.00° off the major axis. For sloped pipes, the
range is 1.50° and 4.50 °. Both ranges can be customized by editing the registry in your
computer. Contact Intergraph support for more information, http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com).
 Square Check - When you model a leg that connects to an existing leg, the software checks
the angle between the two legs and displays a message when the angle is between 87.00°
and 89.95°, or between 90.05° and 93.00° for non-sloped pipes. For sloped pipes, the
ranges are 85.50° and 88.50°, and 91.50° and 94.50°. You can customize these ranges also
by editing the registry in your computer.
 Small Turn Feature Check - The software anticipates that angles equal to or less than 0.5°
are the result of a "fit-up" and, as such, do not need a turn feature. Be aware that even
though a turn feature is not modeled, the angle between the legs is not modified and
remains as you modeled it.

46 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Route Pipe Ribbon

Sets options for routing a pipe.

Normal or Straight Pipe

Properties - Displays the Route Pipe Settings dialog box. For more information, see New
Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 70).
Straight Routing - Click to model a straight pipe.
Arc Routing - Click to model an arc pipe.
Start Route - Click to specify the starting location for the pipe run. The starting point can be
an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space.
End Route - Click to specify the end point of the current pipe run leg. The end point can be
an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space. If the end point is a point in space, then that point serves
as the starting point for the next leg of the pipe run.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays existing pipe runs along with the <New Pipe Run>, <New/Continue Run>,
<Select from P&ID>, <Select Graphically>, and More options. Select the pipe run to route or
select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. If a new pipe run is created, all runs
associated with the parent pipeline selected on the New Pipe Run dialog box appear in the list.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 70).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks if the run already exists in the SmartMarine 3D model. If
the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New Pipe Run
dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the defaults.
When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.

Piping User's Guide 47

Route Pipe

Select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent. For more
information, see Select Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 79).
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle box.
Angle - Enter or select an angle for the current route segment. You can enter any value needed,
provided it does not conflict with the defined specifications. If the Angle Lock is unlocked, this
box displays a dynamic readout of the current bend angle. If you have No Plane selected,
you can only lock the angle to 0 and 90 degrees.
Turn Option - Select the option code associated with the turn component that you want to use
while routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification and shared
by all of the short codes that can be placed automatically while routing appear. Only the options
available for all short codes available during routing are listed. If pipe spec writer only added a
second choice for 90 deg direction change, then route would not display it in the drop down list.
Lock Length - Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length - If Lock Length is locked, enter or select a length for the current route segment. If
Lock Length is unlocked, this box displays the length of the current pipe run leg being placed.
Straight Option - Select the option code associated with the pipe that you want to use while
routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification appear.
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 77).
Lock Slope - Locks or unlocks the Slope box.
Slope - Displays the defined minimum slope for the run. This option is only enabled when you
defined a slope on the New Pipe Run dialog box. If a value greater than or equal to the
minimum slope of the run is entered, it is applied only to the leg currently being routed. After the
leg is modeled, the value of the Slope box reverts to the minimum slope defined for the pipe
run. You cannot enter a slope value that is less than the minimum slope specified for the pipe
run except for 0 to route a horizontal leg in the pipe run. Select Use Default Slope to
automatically change the slope value to match the Minimum Slope property of the pipe run.
You can change the units of measure for the slope using Tools > Options > Units of Measure.

Circular or Arc Pipe

Properties - Displays the Route Pipe Settings dialog box. For more information, see New
Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 70).
Straight Routing - Click to model a straight pipe.
Arc Routing - Click to model an arc pipe.
Arc Start Point - Click to specify the starting location for the arc pipe run. The starting point
can be an equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of
another pipe run, or a point in space.
Arc Center Point - Click to specify the center point for the arc pipe run.
Arc End Point - Click to specify the end point for the arc pipe run. The end point can be an
equipment nozzle, an open port of a feature such as a tee or valve, the end feature of another
pipe run, or a point in space. If the end point is a point in space, then that point serves as the
starting point for the next leg of the pipe run.
Finish - Click to indicate that the points are set and the arc may be routed.

48 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. The arc and straight
options are the same.
Run - Displays existing pipe runs along with the <New Pipe Run>, <New/Continue Run>,
<Select from P&ID>, <Select Graphically>, and More options. Select the pipe run to route or
select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. If a new pipe run is created, all runs
associated with the parent pipeline selected on the New Pipe Run dialog box appear in the list.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 70).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks if the run already exists in the SmartMarine 3D model. If
the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New Pipe Run
dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the defaults.
When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.
Select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent. For more
information, see Select Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 79).
Lock Arc radius - Locks or unlocks the Arc radius box.
Arc radius - Enter or select the radius of the arc pipe. Select Maintain Same Radius to route
an arc pipe from the existing arc maintaining the same radius. This option appears only when
you route from an existing arc.
Lock Arc Angle - Locks or unlocks the Arc angle box.
Arc Angle - Enter or select an angle for the arc segment. You can enter any value needed,
provided it does not conflict with the defined specifications. If the Arc Angle Lock is unlocked,
this box displays a dynamic readout of the current arc angle. If you have No Plane selected,
you can only lock the angle to 0 and 90 degrees.
Lock Arc Length - Locks or unlocks the Arc length box.
Arc Length - If Lock Arc Length is locked, enter or select a length for the current route
segment. If Lock Arc Length is unlocked, this box displays the length of the current pipe run leg
being placed.
Straight option - Select the option code associated with the pipe that you want to use while
routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification appear.

Edit Pipe Straight Feature Ribbon

Displays options for editing a straight feature.
Properties - Displays the Pipe Straight Feature Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 163).
Move From - Click to specify the starting location of the move vector. If you do not define a
starting point, the software assumes that the current location of the object is the starting point.
Move To - Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:

Piping User's Guide 49

Route Pipe

 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected feature is associated. All other
pipe runs associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can
be selected if needed. Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view,
the Workspace Explorer, or the P&ID View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a
different pipeline.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected pipe. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other pipes defined in the piping specification for the current
nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected pipe with one of a
different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected pipe. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code
selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Lock Length - Defines whether or not the length of the selected pipe should remain constant
while moving.
When locked , the software automatically modifies the turn points, along with the length and
angle of adjacent straight features, to remain connected to the moved leg. The length of the
moved leg does not change.
When not locked , the software extends or shortens the associated legs to connect with the
new position of the moved pipe. The length of the moved leg can change. Any component, such
as a valve, on the moved pipe maintains its relative position from the pipe ends.
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are editing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint.
Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more information on setting the
reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 77).
Slope - Displays the slope of the selected straight feature. This option displays only for sloped
pipe runs.

Edit Pipe End Feature Ribbon

Displays options for editing an end component, such as a cap, blind flange, or a pipe end.
Properties - Displays the Pipe End Feature Properties dialog box. For more information,
see Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 155).
Move From - Click to specify the starting location of the move vector. If you do not define a
starting point, the software assumes that the current location of the object is the starting point.

50 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Move To - Click to specify the ending location of the move vector.

Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the route path. Six options are
available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected end feature is associated.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected end. The Type list also contains the
short codes associated with any other end components defined in the piping specification for the
current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected end
component with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected end. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. Selecting another
entry from the Option list updates the object accordingly.
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle box.
Angle - Displays the angle of any turn or branch component that is located at the other end of
the leg with which the selected end feature is associated. If no turn or branch exists at the other
end of the leg, then this box is disabled. Changing the angle value adjusts the position of the
selected end feature to achieve the specified angle and then locks that angle value. When this
box is unlocked, the value updates dynamically as the selected end component is moved.
Lock Length - Locks or unlocks the Length box.
Length - Displays the length of the run leg connected to the end being edited. Entering a value
in this box adjusts the position of the selected end feature to achieve the specified length and
then locks that length value. When this box is unlocked, the value updates dynamically as the
selected end component is moved.
®
Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 77).
Lock Slope - Locks or unlocks the Slope box. This option displays only for sloped pipe runs.
Slope - Displays the defined minimum slope for the end feature. Select Use Default Slope to
automatically change the slope value to match the Minimum Slope property of the pipe run.
You can change the units of measure for the slope using Tools > Options > Units of Measure.
This option displays only for sloped pipe runs.

Edit Branch Feature Ribbon

Displays options for branches placed in the model.

Piping User's Guide 51

Route Pipe

Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected branch. For more
information, see Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 112).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes that the current location of the branch is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected branch. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other branches defined in the piping specification for the
current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected branch
with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected branch. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. Selecting another
entry from the Option list updates the object accordingly.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run to which the branch is associated. All other pipe runs
associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can be
selected if needed. Select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. Select <Select
Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the P&ID
View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a different pipeline.
Angle 1 - Specifies the angle of the branch.
Angle 2 - Specifies the angle of the turn or branch feature located at the other end of the branch
leg. If this box is blank, there is no turn or branch feature located at the end of the branch leg.

Locations of Angle 1 and Angle 2

Flip - Orients the branch so that the selected port is located at the insertion point. If a lateral,
tee, or other tee-type branch is located along the length of a pipe or between two components,
only the in-line ports of the component are available when flipping. However, if the same
component is located at the end of a pipe run, all component ports are available.
Rotate - Select to rotate the branch about the pipe interactively. This option is available only
when nothing has been connected to the branch port.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the branch rotated about the pipe. This option is
available only when nothing has been connected to the branch port.

52 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Branch Position - Select the position of the branch centerline relative to the header centerline.
Select Radial to place the branch such that its centerline intersects the header centerline. Select
Non-Radial to place the branch such that its center line does not intersect the header
centerline. If you select Non-Radial, you can specify the distance the branch centerline is offset
from the header centerline up to being tangent to the outside diameter of the header.

Radial and Non-Radial Positions

Edit Turn Feature Ribbon

Displays options for turns or bends placed in the model.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected turn. For more information,
see Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 168).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes that the current location of the turn is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Plane - Activates options for selecting a working plane for the turn. Six options are available:
 Plan Plane - Defines the work surface as the XY plane at the depth of the active end.
You also can press CTRL+1 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: East-West - Defines the work surface as the XZ plane. You also can
press CTRL+2 to select this option.
 Elevation Plane: North-South - Defines the work surface as the YZ plane. You also
can press CTRL+3 to select this option.
 Plane by Turn/Branch - Defines the work surface as the plane defined by an existing
turn or branch. You select the turn or branch to set the plane. You also can press CTRL+4 to
select this option.
 Plane by Three Points - Defines the work surface using three points that you define.
You also can press CTRL+5 to select this option.
 No Plane - Clears any work surfaces. The software does not project points that you
place to any plane. You also can press CTRL+6 to select this option.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected turn is associated. All other
pipe runs associated with the same pipeline parent also appear in the list. Another pipe run can
be selected if needed. Select <New Pipe Run> to create a new pipe run to route. Select
<Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or
the P&ID View. Select More to select a pipe run associated with a different pipeline.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected turn. The Type list also contains the
short codes associated with any other turns defined in the piping specification for the current
nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected turn with one of a
different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected turn. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code

Piping User's Guide 53

Route Pipe

selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Flip - Orients the turn so that the other turn port is connected to the end of the run. This
option is available only when a turn is connected to the end of a run and no other part has been
connected to the other turn port.
Lock Angle - Locks or unlocks the Angle 2 and Angle 3 boxes. Locking the corresponding
angle value creates a constraint along which the selected turn angle can be moved.
Angle 2 - Specifies the angle of the turn feature located at the end of one associated leg. If this
box is blank, there is no turn feature located at the end of the leg. When you select this box, the
software highlights the Angle 2 turn feature in the model. Although this value can be changed,
the location of the corresponding turn cannot. Modification of this value repositions the selected
turn until the specified angle is achieved.
Angle 1 - Specifies the angle of the turn that you are editing. Modification of this value
repositions the selected turn until the specified angle is achieved.
Angle 3 - Specifies the angle of the turn feature located at the end of one associated leg. If this
box is blank, there is no turn feature located at the end of the leg. When you select this box, the
software highlights the Angle 2 turn feature in the model. Although this value can be changed,
the location of the corresponding turn cannot. Modification of this value repositions the selected
turn until the specified angle is achieved.

Locations of Angles 1, 2, and 3

Offset - Controls the SmartSketch offset constraint. Type the distance that you want to offset
the pipe that you are routing. Select <Disabled> if you do not want to use the offset constraint to
help route the pipe. Select Set Offset Reference to define the reference point. For more
information on setting the reference point, see Set Offset Reference Dialog Box (on page 77).
Modify Slope - Activates the Modify Slope dialog box, with which you can modify the slope
of the legs on either side of the selected turn. For more information, see Modify Slope Dialog
Box (on page 79).

Edit Pipe Part Ribbon

Displays options for editing the selected object. This ribbon displays when you set the Locate
Filter to Piping Parts, and select a part in the model.
Properties - Displays the properties dialog box for the selected object.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run with which the selected object is associated. You
cannot change the run.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected object. The Type list also contains
the short codes associated with any other objects defined in the piping specification for the

54 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the Type list replaces the selected object with
one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected object. The Option list also contains any options
defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type box. For example, if
two different wall thickness values are available in the piping specification for the short code
selected in the Type box, both options appear in this list. Selecting another entry from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.
Name - Specifies the object name. You can enter a new name if needed.
Tag - Specifies the engineering tag for the object.
Base/Mating Part - Displays whether the selected object is a base part or a mating part. If the
object is a mating part, you can use this option to change the object to a base part. Use caution
however, because after a mating part has been changed to a base part, it cannot be changed
back to a mating part again.

Edit Surface Mount Pipe Component Ribbon

Displays options for surface mount pipe components placed in the model.
Properties - Opens a dialog box with properties for the selected surface mount pipe
component. Allows you to review the properties of the selected component and change the
value assigned to a property.
Move From - Defines the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting point, the
current location of the end feature is assumed to be the starting point.
Move To - Defines the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Specifies the name of the pipe run on which the component is placed.
Type - Displays the tag associated with the selected component. In addition, the Type list
contains the tags associated with other surface mount components. Selecting an entry from the
Type list replaces the selected component with one of a different tag.
Rotate - Rotates the surface-mounted component about the pipe interactively around the
feature axis.
Angle - Defines the angle for rotating the component around the pipe.

What do you want to do?

 Create a new pipe run (on page 56)
 Create an arc pipe run
 Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run (on page 57)
 Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors (on page 57)
 Place components while routing pipes (on page 58)
 Place splits while routing pipes (on page 59)
 Route a sloped pipe run (on page 59)
 Route a multi-sloped pipe run (on page 60)
 Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location (on page 61)
 Route a pipe run at specified distance (on page 61)
 Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction (on page 62)
 Route a pipe run with an offset (on page 63)
 Copy a pipe run (on page 64)
 Extend an existing pipe run (on page 64)
 Extend an existing arc pipe (on page 64)

Piping User's Guide 55

Route Pipe

 Merge pipe runs (on page 64)

 Choose a working plane (on page 66)
 Select pipe run settings (on page 66)
 Change the flow direction of a pipe run (on page 66)
 Route a branch at a specific angle (on page 62)
 Route a pipe from R3D nozzle (on page 63)
 Convert turn feature to an arc (on page 67)
 Place a tee from a P&ID (on page 67)
 Place a nozzle from a P&ID (on page 67)
 Correlate existing equipment for use in an integrated environment (on page 68)
 Correlate new equipment for use in an integrated environment (on page 68)
 Update equipment for use in an integrated environment (on page 69)
 Manually correlate multiple SmartMarine 3D pipe runs/pipelines with a P&ID pipe
run/pipeline (on page 69)
 Compare design basis with the model (on page 70)

Create a new pipe run

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, a tap, a branch port, or a point
along a straight feature, the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a
name, the software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 66)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
6. Select the ending point of the pipe leg. Right-click to end a pipe run.

 You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting the
run name from the list of available runs.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

56 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you
want to route. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you want
to route.
3. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
4. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
5. Select the run to route from the P&ID drawing.
6. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given. This step saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.

 If process data was not defined on the P&ID, then you must manually enter a
temperature and pressure.
 You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators when
defining your pipe run.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.
8. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run that does not terminate
in a nozzle or branch.
Your plant must be registered with the SmartPlant integrated environment to use this
procedure.

Route pipe across P&ID off-page connectors

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&IDs that contain the runs to route. You can
skip this step if the P&IDs have already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID that contains the first part of the run to
route.
3. Select All or Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
6. From the P&ID drawing, select the run to route.
7. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given. This step saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
8. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
9. Right-click to end a pipe run in space (not terminated on a nozzle or branch).
After routing, notice that the correlation color in the P&ID Viewer does not show a
data match. This mismatch is because the second part of the run noted through the off-page

Piping User's Guide 57

Route Pipe

connector has not yet been routed and correlated. The off-page connector displays the
corresponding P&ID to find the matching connector.
10. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the corresponding P&ID noted by the previous
drawing.
11. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
12. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
13. Select the other side of the run to route from the corresponding P&ID.
14. The New Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design basis.
Click OK to accept the properties given, which saves the correlated run information and
closes the New Pipe Run dialog box.
15. Route the run to the end of the first pipe run. Because the software places a weld when the
two ends are connected, you should choose an appropriate location along the pipe run for
the weld caused by the off-page connector. This prevents unnecessary welds from being
created.

Place components while routing pipes

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, or a point along a straight feature,
the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a
name, the software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 66)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to begin routing your pipe run.
6. Click Insert Component when you want to insert a component.
Insert a component (on page 107)
7. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting
the run name from the list of available runs.

58 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Place splits while routing pipes

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select a feature located at the end of an existing run, the software continues the
run of the selected feature. Skip to step 5.
 If you select an equipment nozzle, a point in space, or a point along a straight feature,
the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
3. On the Pipe Run dialog box, type a name for the Pipe Run. If you do not enter a name, the
software automatically generates a name.
Select pipe run settings (on page 66)
4. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select points to begin routing your pipe run.
6. Click Insert Component when you want to insert a component.
Insert a component (on page 107)
7. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
You can continue routing an existing run by selecting a run end feature or by selecting
the run name from the list of available runs.

Route a sloped pipe run

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point in an elevation view.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, select the parent Pipeline.
4. In the Name box, type a name for the pipe run. If you do not enter a name, the software
automatically generates a name.
5. Select the Minimum Slope box, and then enter the slope for the pipe run. For example, 2
deg or 0.5in / 1.0ft.
6. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify if you are routing from the high point or
the low point of the pipe run.
8. Click OK in the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
9. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
10. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.

 You can unlock the slope on the ribbon to temporarily override the slope. For example, you
will need to unlock the slope to model a vertical drop in the pipe run.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Piping User's Guide 59

Route Pipe

Route a multi-sloped pipe run

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point in an elevation view.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, select the parent Pipeline.
4. In the Name box, type a name for the pipe run. If you do not enter a name, the software
automatically generates a name.
5. Select the Minimum Slope box, and then enter the slope for the pipe run. For example, 2
deg or 0.5in / 1.0ft.
6. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify if you are routing from the high point or
the low point of the pipe run.
8. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, select Run contains multiple slope
orientation to indicate that the pipe run will slope both up and down.
9. Click OK on the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
10. Select points to define the route of your pipe run.
You can use PinPoint, Point Along, and the SmartSketch® relationship indicators
when defining your pipe run.
11. When you are finish routing in that particular direction (for example, sloping down).
Right-click to end a pipe run.
12. Click Route Pipe again.
13. In the Run box on the ribbon, select <New/Continue Run>.
14. Select the pipe end feature where you stopped in step 11.
15. In the Specify Slope Direction dialog box, specify the other direction.
16. Click OK on the Specify Slope Direction dialog box.
17. Select point to define the route of your pipe run.
18. Repeat steps 11 through 17 until you have completed the pipe run route.
The Run contains multiple slope orientations option on the Specify Slope
Direction dialog box indicates that the pipe run slopes both up and down. After you specify that
a pipe run has multiple slope orientations, you cannot clear the selection. You should only route
pipe runs with multiple slope orientations when it is absolutely required. In addition, pipe runs
with multiple slope orientations may behave unexpectedly during modification operations.

60 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate location

1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the coordinate system that contains the location to which you want to route.
3. Select the Rectangular Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. Select the Set Target to Origin option on the PinPoint ribbon to move the PinPoint
target to the specified coordinate system's origin.
8. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation coordinates to which you
want to route.
9. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a pipe run at specified distance

1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the Relative Tracking option on the PinPoint ribbon.
3. Select the Rectangular Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation distance (from the PinPoint
target) to route the pipe run.
8. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point. The software moves the
PinPoint target to the new location.
9. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the easting, northing, or elevation distance to route the pipe
run.
10. Continue defining points as needed.
11. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. You do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Piping User's Guide 61

Route Pipe

Route a pipe run at specified distance and direction

1. Click Tools > PinPoint.
2. Select the Relative Tracking option on the PinPoint ribbon.
3. Select the Spherical Coordinates option on the PinPoint ribbon.
4. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the run starting point.
6. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
7. In the PinPoint ribbon, type the absolute distance and direction to route.
8. Click in the view to route the pipe run to the specified point. The software moves the
PinPoint target to the new location.
9. Continue defining points as needed.
10. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a branch at a specific angle

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the branch run starting point (the end not connected to the header).

3. Select a point on the header at approximately the correct angle and direction that you want.

4. In the Locate Filter, select Piping Features.

5. Select the Pipe Along Leg Feature where the branch connects to the header. You will
probably need to use Quick Pick in order to select the correct feature.
6. In the Angle 1 box on the ribbon, type the actual angle that you want the branch to connect
to the header.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the branch. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

62 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Route a pipe run with an offset

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.
3. Define the pipe run properties on the New Pipe Run dialog box, and then click OK.
4. From the Offset option, select Set Offset Reference.
5. Select the option to use from the Measured from field.
6. Type the offset distance to use in the Offset box.
7. Click OK on the Set Offset Reference dialog box.
8. Select the appropriate route plane. The offset glyph will not appear if you do not set a plane.
9. Move the cursor over the object in the model from which you want to measure the offset
until the object is added to the SmartSketch locate list. This glyph appears.

10. Move the cursor until the offset line and glyph appear, and then click to route the pipe
run.
11. Select the ending point of the pipe run. Right-click to end a pipe run.
If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. You do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a pipe from R3D nozzle

Prior to routing a pipe, make sure that your Reference 3D model attributes are mapped to
corresponding SmartMarine 3D attributes.
1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the Reference 3D nozzle until the Circle 3d glyph
appears, and then click to route the pipe run.
3. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, select the parent Pipeline.
If there are no pipeline systems defined in Workspace Explorer, then create a new
pipeline system or select a pipeline system from the database to which you want to
associate the new pipe run.
4. In the Name box, type a name for the pipe run. If you do not enter a name, the software
automatically generates a name.
5. On the Reference 3D tab, fill all the required properties. You can also edit the existing
properties as needed. For more information see, Reference 3D Tab (on page 76).
6. Click OK to close the New Pipe Run dialog box.
7. Select the end point of the pipe run, and then right-click to end a pipe run.

Piping User's Guide 63

Route Pipe

Copy a pipe run

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to copy.
4. Click Edit > Copy.
5. Select an origin point (a "from" point) for the copied objects.
6. Click Edit > Paste.
7. Clear the Paste in place option if it is selected.
8. Identify a location in the model for the copied pipe run.
If you position an end of the copied pipe run so that it touches a pipe run end or nozzle,
the system automatically connects the two.

Extend an existing pipe run

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the end feature from which to extend the pipe run.
3. Route the pipe run as needed.

Extend an existing arc pipe

1. Click Route Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Arc Routing to change the route mode from straight to arc.
3. Select the end feature from which to extend the arc pipe run.
4. Select a center point to specify the direction and normal for the arc.
5. Enter the arc radius. If you need to route the arc with the same radius, select Maintain
Same Radius in the Arc Radius drop-down list.
The center point is adjusted according to the radius value.
6. Select the end point.
7. In the Arc Angle, key in the required angle.
8. Route the arc pipe as needed.

Merge pipe runs

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.

64 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

3. Select the end feature of the pipe run you want to merge (delete).

4. Press and hold the SHIFT key.

5. Select the end feature at the other end of the pipe run you want to merge.
The software automatically selects all the features between the two features that you
selected.

6. In the Run box on the ribbon, select <Select Graphically>.

7. In a graphic view, select the pipe run to which you want the selected pipe features assigned.
The software re-assigns the selected pipe features to the newly identified pipe run.

8. Select Piping Runs in the locate filter.

Piping User's Guide 65

Route Pipe

9. In the Workspace Explorer, find the now empty pipe run and delete it.
If other objects, such as pipe supports, are still assigned to the "empty" pipe run (the
run with no piping features), you will need to move these item to the merged pipe run prior to
deleting the empty pipe run.
If the flow direction of the newly merged pipe run is corrupt, you can use the
ValidateFlowDirCmd.ValidateFlowDir custom command to search for and fix corrupt flow
directions in your model. If the issue persists, then you can enable the
CheckFlowDirectionConsistency registry entry for further validation. In case of flow direction
inconsistency a warning message is displayed. Contact support with this message.

Choose a working plane

1. Click Plane on the ribbon.
2. Select the routing plane for your pipe run.

 When you select a routing plane, the software highlights the plane in the model.
 You also can press CTRL-1, CTRL-2, CTRL-3, CTRL-4, CTRL-5, and CTRL-6 to select a
working plane.

Select pipe run settings

1. On the New Pipe Run dialog box, choose the pipeline for the new run in the Pipeline box.
The Pipeline box lists up to the last ten selected pipelines. Choosing the More option
at the bottom of the list allows you to browse all pipelines in the model.
2. Optionally, in the Name box, type the name of the new pipe run that you are creating.
3. Set the specification of the new pipe run in the Specification box.
4. In the Nominal Diameter box, select the NPD for the pipe run.
5. Set other pipe run properties as needed.
6. Click OK to return to the Route Pipe command.

 Use the Category option to view more properties that you can set for the pipe run.
 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Change the flow direction of a pipe run

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run for which you want to change the flow direction.
4. Click one of the flow direction indicators that appear on the pipe run.
5. Select a new flow direction on the Flow dialog box.

 The flow directional indicators are listed below:

Bi-directional

66 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Upstream
Downstream
No flow
Undefined
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit the flow direction property of a run.

Convert turn feature to an arc

1. Select a pipe turn feature.
2. Right-click on the turn feature.
3. On the right-click menu, select Convert Turn to Arc.
After you convert a turn feature to arc, you can revert to turn feature. Right-click the arc
feature, and select Convert Arc to Turn on the right-click menu.

Place a tee from a P&ID

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the pipe runs for
that branch. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains pipe runs.
3. Review the P&ID to determine where you need to insert the tee or branch in the model.
Specifically, you need to identify the header and branch pipe runs.
4. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the header run in which to insert the tee or other branch component.
6. Select the component type and the option in the Type and Option boxes.
7. Position the component on the header pipe run.
8. Click Finish.
9. Using the Route Pipe command, route the branch pipe run into the branch component
that you just placed on the header pipe run.
As you model and branch into a header line, a tee is automatically generated by the
software.

Place a nozzle from a P&ID

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID that contains the nozzle to place. You can
skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID that contains the nozzle to place.
3. In the P&ID, select the nozzle to place in the model.
4. Click Place Nozzle on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the equipment or designed equipment object on which to place the nozzle.
You can either select the shape in a graphic view, or you can select it in the
Workplace Explorer.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box appears.
6. Verify that the property values defined on the Occurrence tab are correct as compared to
the nozzle report.

Piping User's Guide 67

Route Pipe

7. On the Location tab, specify the placement type and enter values for the location
parameters as needed.
8. Click OK.
The Nozzle Properties dialog box closes, and you return to the model with the nozzle
placed.
9. Click SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis, and verify the correlation status of the nozzle
in the model.
10. If necessary, click Update to transfer data in the P&ID to match the 3D model object.

 The software automatically sets all mapped nozzle properties in the 3D model as defined by
the currently selected P&ID nozzle.
 After the nozzle is placed in the 3D model, it can be moved without affecting the correlation.
If it is deleted, it does not delete the P&ID design basis object.
 Correlation is a relationship between an object in the 3D model and the corresponding
object in the P&ID. For example, a nozzle in the 3D model is related to a nozzle in the P&ID.
 The occurrence properties of the nozzle object in the 3-D model that are not correlated with
corresponding properties in the design basis object (that is, the nozzle in the P&ID) can be
edited without changing the correlation status.

Correlate existing equipment for use in an integrated

environment
If the nozzles exist on the equipment before you correlate, then the software attempts to
correlate the nozzles automatically. Otherwise, you must correlate existing equipment in two
processes. First, correlate the body. Then, correlate the nozzles in a separate process.

Correlate the Body

1. Select Correlate with Design Basis.
2. Select the main equipment body.
3. Select the equipment on the P&ID.

Correlate the Nozzles

1. Select Correlate with Design Basis.
2. Select a nozzle on the equipment.
3. Select the corresponding nozzle on the P&ID.
If the nozzle names in the 3D model and the names identified in the P&ID match, then
the nozzles correlate to the correct state. If there are any discrepancies, you can view them
using the SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis command.

Correlate new equipment for use in an integrated

environment
1. Select the equipment from the P&ID.
2. Select Place Equipment to create the equipment folder, and select the matching
equipment by type using the catalog.
3. Place the shape and select the equipment parent.

68 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

4. Select the nozzle from the P&ID.

5. Click Place Nozzle .
6. Select the designed equipment parent for the nozzle.
7. Position the nozzle on the equipment.
You must enter all of the size, end preparation, termination class, and rating practice
information for the first nozzle that you place. The software reads all subsequent nozzle
information directly from the P&ID.

Update equipment for use in an integrated

environment
1. Click Compare Design Basis.
2. Select the equipment folder from the Workspace Explorer, or select the symbol from the
P&ID.
3. Click Update.

 Updating adjusts all of the nozzles associated with the main body as well as the equipment
body itself. The nozzles and the equipment appear highlighted in the Workspace
Explorer. If they are not highlighted then you can select the equipment in the Workspace
Explorer and choose Select Nested. Then, select SmartPlant > Compare Design
Basis. Select Update to update the equipment and all associated nozzles.
 If you change dimensions or names of a nozzle, then you must update that nozzle
separately.

Manually correlate multiple SmartMarine 3D pipe

runs/pipelines with a P&ID pipe run/pipeline
If a P&ID pipe run or pipeline is split into multiple pipe runs or pipelines in SmartMarine 3D, you
can use the following procedure to manually correlate these multiple SmartMarine 3D piping
objects to the single P&ID pipe run or pipeline.
If you are correlating pipelines, ensure to set the filter to Pipelines; likewise, for pipe
runs, set the filter to Piping Runs. This is because you cannot select pipelines in P&ID and the
software uses the filter to determine what kind of piping objects you are correlating.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve P&ID data into the software.
2. Open the P&ID in the P&ID File Viewer.
3. Click SmartPlant > Correlate with Design Basis.
4. Select an object in the 3D model that you want to correlate.
5. In the P&ID File Viewer, select the object that you want to correlate.
The software detects whether the P&ID object is already correlated to one or more 3D
object. When you see the following message, click Yes to continue.
Selected Design Basis object is already correlated to another 3d object. Are you sure you
want to correlate more than one 3D object the same Design Basis object?
6. Review the Correlate with Design Basis dialog box, set correlating options as needed, and
click Update.

Piping User's Guide 69

Route Pipe

7. Review discrepancies between the SmartMarine 3D piping object and the design basis
using the SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis command.
The Compare Design Basis command helps you to determine if there are missing
correlations to the P&ID piping object.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to correlate more SmartMarine 3D objects to the P&ID piping object.
When all related objects in the 3D model are correlated with the P&ID piping object, the
Correlation Status property of these 3D objects shows Correlated with data consistency.

Compare design basis with the model

The Compare with Design Basis command allows you to resolve discrepancies between an
object in the 3D model and the design basis.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve data into the software.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to open the P&ID that contains the data that you retrieved.
3. Select an object on the P&ID or in the model.
4. Click SmartPlant > Compare Design Basis.
5. Review the Properties tab for highlighted objects that have a discrepancy between the
P&ID and the three-dimensional model. Objects that do not match appear in a different
background color (red).
6. Review the Topology tab to check for differences in shapes between the P&ID and the 3D
model. This tab is available only for objects that support correlation.
When you select a pipe run, the Topology tab indicates objects that are correlated and
in the same order on the pipe run, as well as objects that are correlated and not in the same
order on the pipe run.
7. Click Close if you do not want to update the properties from design basis.
-OR-
After you correct the errors that cause the discrepancy, click Update on the Compare with
Design Basis dialog box to transfer data from the design basis object to the 3D model
object and update properties that are out-of-date. The Design Basis Value and the Model
Value columns change to show the new values.

 Clicking Update changes the property values. You can selectively update properties by
selecting associated check boxes. For more information see, Properties Tab (Compare
with Design Basis Dialog Box).
 For certain exceptions, the software does not process an update. For example, an
object that is not mapped with properties is not updated.
8. When you have finished your review, click Close.

New Pipe Run Dialog Box

Creates a new pipe run in your model using properties that you specify. You can access the
New Pipe Run dialog box by going to the Piping task, selecting the Route Pipe command,
and then selecting <New Pipe Run> from the Run option on the ribbon bar.
Defaults for the new pipe run can be inherited from the pipe run you are connecting to, from a
P&ID in an integrated environment, or from the grandparent piping system default properties
values as defined in the Systems and Specifications task.

70 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Pipe run properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Testing,
Temperature and Pressure, Surface Treatment and Coating, Insulation and Tracing, and
Responsibility. You can select the category that you want to define values for by using the
Category option.

Property Defaults Source

These four buttons indicate and control the default property values for the new pipe run. When a
button is active and pressed, the defaults from that button are being used. You can press a
different active button to use the defaults from that button. If a button is disabled, then no default
properties for that button are available for use. Default property values from the design basis
have the highest priority.
Piping System - Default properties on the parent piping system are used.
Pipeline System - Default properties on the parent pipeline system are used.
Pipe Run - Default properties from an existing pipe run are used.
Last Used - Default properties that you used to place the last pipe run will be used for this
pipe run.

Standard
Pipeline - Select the pipeline system to which you want the pipe run to belong. The last pipeline
system that you selected is the default. Select More to display all defined pipeline systems. You
can create a new pipeline in the Systems and Specifications task.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run. The pipe run name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you specify a name in this box, the software automatically sets the Name Rule box
to User Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to name this pipe run. You can select one of the listed
rules or specify the pipe run name yourself in the Name box.
Specification - Select the pipe specification that you want to control this pipe run. Only those
pipe specifications that are allowed in the pipeline that you selected appear. You assign pipe
specifications to pipeline systems in the System and Specifications task. You define pipe
specifications in the reference data. See the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Nominal Diameter - Select the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) for the pipe run. The pipe
specification controls the available NPDs in this list. If you select an equipment nozzle as the
starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the NPD of the nozzle as the
NPD of the pipe run. You can select the NPD units to display on a session file basis using the
Tools > Options command on the Units of Measure tab.
Flow Direction - Select the flow direction for the pipe run. If you select an equipment nozzle as
the starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the flow direction of the
nozzle as the flow direction of the pipe run.
Minimum Slope - Displays the slope for the pipe run. You can specify the slope as a ratio, a
percentage, or in degrees.
 As a ratio, if a run drops 1/4" for every foot of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
1/4"/1'-0".
 As a percentage, if a run drops 1" for every 10" of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
10%.
 In degrees, a five-degree slope can be specified as 5deg.
Slope Direction - Displays the direction type of the pipe run slope. If it is set to Single, the pipe
run slopes either up or down. You can change this to Multiple if needed. If it is set to Multiple,

Piping User's Guide 71

Route Pipe

the pipe run can slope both up and down. You cannot change this setting back to Single once
Multiple is selected.
Schedule Override - Displays the thickness override for parts in the pipe run. If the piping
specification rules do not allow you to override components, then the software disables this
option.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipe run has been correlated to a pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Displays if the pipe run is required to be correlated to a P&ID pipe run.
Select Correlate object if the pipe run has a correlating pipe run in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the pipe run does not have a correlating pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Displays if the component is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the topology mismatch of components can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the data and topology mismatches of components can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.

Temperature and Pressure

If service limits have been defined, then you must define one set of pressure/temperature
values (Design Maximum Temperature and Design Maximum Pressure, for example) before
you can place the object. The software does not prevent you from defining testing temperatures
and pressures that exceed the defined service limits.
Design Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum operating pressure. Include the
pressure unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this
value.
Testing Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.

72 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Testing Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Design Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum operating pressure. Include the pressure
unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.

Piping User's Guide 73

Route Pipe

Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Select the insulation specification to use. Select More to choose an
insulation specification allowed for the system. You assign which insulation specifications are
available in which systems in the System and Specifications task.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the purpose of the insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference
data.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Material box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the insulation material to use.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated
or a specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the
insulation thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the pipe run is heat-traced. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.

74 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing the weld on the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.

How the Software Evaluates Defaults

Piping User's Guide 75

Route Pipe

See Also
Route Pipe (on page 45)
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 158)

Defaults Tab (Route Pipe Settings Dialog Box)

The Defaults tab is only displayed when you are actively routing a pipe run and you click the
Settings option on the ribbon bar.
Minimum Straight Length - Displays the minimum allowed length of straight pipe.
Straight Option - Select the option code associated with the pipe that you want to use while
routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification appear.
Turn Option - Select the option code associated with the turn component that you want to use
while routing. Only those option codes defined in the controlling piping specification and shared
by all of the short codes that can be placed automatically while routing appear. Only the options
available for all short codes available during routing are listed. If pipe spec writer only added a
second choice for 90 deg direction change, then route would not display it in the drop down list.
Branch Type - Select the option code for the branch type that you want to use while routing.
Automatic Angle Lock On - Specifies if the Angle lock should automatically lock when you type
a new angle value into the Angle box.
Bend Radius Multiplier - Specify the bend radius multiplier for bends. This overrides the
default bend radius multiplier defined in the piping specification. This field is not available unless
the Pipe Bend Radius By User Option is set to Pipe Bend Radius By User Is Enabled in the
Catalog task. You can find the option in Catalog under the Piping > Piping Specifications >
Plant Options node in the tree view.

Reference 3D Tab
Displays Reference 3D object properties. You can modify these properties as needed.
This tab is available only when you select a Reference 3D object.
Port ID - Displays the name of the Reference 3D object port.
Nominal Size - Enter the nominal size of the port.
NPD Unit Type - Enter the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm (millimeters) or in
(inches).
Termination Class - Specifies the termination class for the nozzle.
Termination Sub Class - Specifies the termination sub-class for the nozzle.
End Preparation - Enter the end preparation code for the part port. Select a valid code from the
drop-down list.
End Practice - Specifies the end practice for the nozzle.
End Standard - Enter the end standard code for the part port. Select a valid code from the
drop-down list.
Rating Practice - Specifies the rating practice for the nozzle.
Pressure Rating - Enter the pressure rating code for the part port. Select a valid code from the
drop-down list.
Schedule Practice - Specifies the schedule practice for the nozzle.
Schedule Thickness - Enter the schedule thickness short description or code for the part port.
Select a valid code or short description from the drop-down list.

76 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Set Offset Reference Dialog Box

Sets options for reference offsets.
Offset Reference Type - Select the offset type you want to use.
 External - Route a pipe a specified distance from another object, such as another pipe
running parallel to the one you are placing.
 Cardinal Point - Route a pipe by the top, sides, bottom, or invert elevation of the pipe
instead of the pipe centerline. You must use Tools > Pinpoint and lock the plane when
using this reference type.
Include Insulation Thickness - Select this option to include the pipe's insulation thickness
when calculating the cardinal point offset. Clear this option to have the cardinal point be the
edge of the pipe and ignore the insulation thickness. This option is only available with Offset
Reference Type is set to Cardinal Point.
If the referenced object is planar surface (such as a deck) or a linear element (such as a
structural beam), then the offset distance is measured from the surface or line to the selected
reference plane (for example, the x-plane ) on which the pipe is being routed.

Offset - Type the distance that you want to offset. You can turn off the offset option by selecting
<Disabled>.
Measured From - Select the object from which you want to measure the offset. You can select
from:
 Centerline - Select this option if you want to measure the offset from the centerline of a pipe
run.
 Pipe Surface - Select this option if you want to measure the offset from the outside surface
of a pipe run.
 Insulation Surface - Select this option if you want to measure from the outside insulation
surface.
 Largest Surface - Select this option if you want to measure from the object that has the
greatest diameter on the pipe run. The object could be the pipe surface, insulation surface, a
flange, a valve, or any other pipe part.

Piping User's Guide 77

Route Pipe

 Staggered - Select this option to measure from the largest object on the pipe that you are
routing to the largest surface on the pipe that you are referencing. Use this option when you
want to get pipe centerlines as close as possible by staggering the location of split flanges.
See Also
Route a Pipe Run with an Offset (on page 63)

Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box

Defines the slope direction of a new pipe run and whether the pipe run can have multiple slope
orientations (slope both up and down in the same pipe run).

High Point - Select this option to indicate that the pipe run end point that you just identified is
the highest point on the pipe run.
Low Point - Select this option to indicate that the pipe run end point that you just identified is the
lowest point on the pipe run.
Run contains multiple slope orientation - Indicates that the pipe run will slope both up and
down. After you specify that a pipe run has multiple slope orientations, you cannot clear the
selection.
You should only route pipe runs with multiple slope orientations when it is absolutely
required.
See Also
Route a Multi-Sloped Pipe Run (on page 60)
Route a Sloped Pipe Run (on page 59)

78 Piping User's Guide

 Route Pipe

Modify Slope Dialog Box

Modifies the slope of a pipe run leg that is connected to a turn. You can modify the slope of only
one leg at a time. You must select a turn feature, and then select the Modify Slope option
on the ribbon to activate this dialog box.

Current Slope Values - Displays the current slope for each leg connected to the turn. Legs with
an invalid slope display in italics.
New Slope Value - Select the leg for which you want to modify the slope, and then select a new
slope. The leg that you are editing highlights in the model. If you are trying to model a small
slope but cannot get the software to model it, you might be hitting the minimum slope setting in
the registry. Contact Intergraph Support for assistance in editing the setting.

Select Pipe Run Dialog Box

This dialog box displays all of the pipe runs that have been placed in the defined Workspace.
Select a pipe run from the hierarchy, and then click OK. The dialog box displays when you
select More... from the Run box in the Route Pipe ribbon.

See Also
Route Pipe (on page 45)
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 158)

Piping User's Guide 79

Route Pipe

Select System Dialog Box

This dialog box displays all of the defined pipeline systems so that you can select the pipeline
system that you want.
Look in - Specify where you want to look for the pipeline system. Select Workspace to look for
the pipeline system in your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the pipeline
system in the entire model database.

Insulation Specification Dialog Box

Displays the available insulation specifications for the active piping system. Select the insulation
specification that you want to use, and then click OK.

You can modify the list of available insulation specification by switching to the Systems
and Specifications task, selecting the piping system or pipeline system that you want to modify,
and then selecting the Allowed Specifications command on the ribbon bar.

80 Piping User's Guide

 Moving Pipe Features

SECTION 4

Moving Pipe Features

After you complete routing a pipe run, you can move the features along the leg of that run. By
moving the features, you can alter the route of the pipe, connection points, or component
placement. Using this ability to move features of your pipe runs, you can precisely locate each
feature in the layout of your piping systems.
The various types of features that you can move in this method include the following:

Straight Features
The straight feature and other connected route features move subject to the following rules:
 Moving a straight feature moves the entire leg to which the feature is connected.
 The move direction is always perpendicular to the axis of the straight feature.
 A branch feature connected to the moved leg maintains its original angle.
 Movement stops when parts on the associated leg overlap, or when they overlap with
adjacent parts on connected legs.
 As long as the end of the leg connected to the equipment nozzle is in the same plane as the
turn or branch, the leg moves and shrinks—if, however, the logically connected end feature
is not overlapping another feature on the leg.
When moving straight features, you can select one of the orientation handles that appear at the
ends of the straight feature as your "move from" point. These orientation handles allow you to
move the pipe in relation to the edge of the pipe instead of the pipe centerline. For example, you
can use the orientation handles to align the bottom of pipe with the top of a beam. The display of
the orientation handles is controlled by the Key point option on the Tools > Options >
SmartSketch tab. Unless you need them, we recommend that you keep the orientation handles
turned off as they can cause selecting the pipe end feature challenging.

Piping User's Guide 81

Moving Pipe Features

Straight Features with Terminus Features

Selecting a straight feature will sometimes not result in a move because the software cannot
constrain the move vectors and maintain them during the move. However, if you select a straight
feature along with its terminus features, such as turns or branches, the software tries to maintain
the angles of the terminus features.

 You cannot move a single turn this way.

 If moving the straight feature and terminus features results in a degenerated case, the
software attempts to move all of the selected features back to their last committed locations.

Turn Features
The turn feature and other connected route features move subjected to the following rules:
 If you move a turn to a position where the two adjacent legs are collinear (that is, the turn
reaches 180 degrees), the software deletes the turn.
 The turn stops moving when it starts to overlap with an adjacent along leg feature.
 If neither angle 2 or 3 is locked, the move is along the bisector. If either angle 2 or 3 is
locked, the move is along the other leg.

End Features
The end feature and other connected route features move subjected to the following rules:
 Moving the end feature edits the length of the straight feature.
 Moving the end feature edits the topology of the turn feature or the branch feature if
connected to another leg. The default motion plane is the connected Turn Feature or Along
Leg Feature.
 You cannot move an end feature connected to a nozzle.
 You cannot move the end feature past the point where the straight feature length becomes
zero, such as the point where an end feature touches a nozzle or free port of another
feature.

82 Piping User's Guide

 Moving Pipe Features

 For non-branching situations, if you move or paste an end feature within ¼ inch (6.35 mm)
of another end feature, the software automatically connects the two end features. This
automatic connection works for both flange and butt-weld connections. Please note that the
software will lengthen or shorten the pipe length to make the connection.

Branch Features
 If the branch and header are in the motion plane, the branch feature moves along the
branch leg.
 If the branch and header are not in the motion plane, the end of the branch leg and branch
feature move to keep the branch angle constant.
 You can move the branch feature along the associated straight feature. As you move the
feature, the angle between the branch feature and the branch leg appears in a dynamic
readout.

Along Leg Features

 You can move along leg features along the pipe on which you placed them. The software
prevents you from moving the along leg feature past the end of the pipe or to a position that
would cause parts to overlap.
 Along Leg Features that are not branches (valves and flanges are examples) maintain a
position at a constant distance from the fixed end of the leg.
You can move features only after you finish routing a pipe run and placing components. Edit
commands are not available until you complete routing or placement. You can complete a
feature move by right-clicking or by pressing Esc.

Tagged Components
The software does not replace components with a TAG when re-computing a run after a move
operation. Components like elbows and tees' should not have a TAG because that will prevent
the software from replacing them when needed during the re-compute.

What do you want to do?

 Move a pipe run (on page 84)
 Move a branch (on page 84)
 Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet (on page 84)
 Move a pipe end (on page 85)
 Move a straight pipe (on page 85)
 Move a turn (on page 86)

Piping User's Guide 83

Moving Pipe Features

Move a pipe run

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to move.
4. Select Move on the main ribbon.
5. Select a motion plane on the ribbon.
6. Select a location either on the pipe run or in the model to use as the move-from location.
Use the end of the pipe run as the move-from location if you are trying to connect the
pipe run to a nozzle or another pipe run. If you move the end within ¼ inch (6.35 mm) of
another pipe end, the software automatically connects the two ends. Please note that the
software will lengthen or shorten the pipe length as needed to make the connection.
7. Identify the move-to location in the model.

Move a branch
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the straight pipe of the branch to move.
By selecting the straight pipe of the branch, the software automatically moves the
branching feature (the tee for example) along the header. If you select the tee, only the tee
and that end of the straight pipe move along the header, which causes the tee to be
removed.
4. Click Move To .
5. Identify the move to point.
If you do not define a starting point by using Move From the software assumes that
the current location of the object is the starting point.

Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.

84 Piping User's Guide

 Moving Pipe Features

3. Drag a fence around the branch-parent feature (on the header leg), the olet, and the
end-feature at the free end of the olet.

4. Select either Route Multi-Move or the Move command and move the selected olet
to the new location on the header.

Move a pipe end

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe end that you want to move.
Make sure you select the pipe end and not the pipe itself.
4. Click Move To on the ribbon.
5. Identify the new location for the pipe end.

 You can use the Length box to type a new length for the pipe. The software moves the pipe
end to the specified length.
 If you move a pipe end within ¼ inch (6.35 mm) of another pipe end, the software
automatically connects to two ends. Please note that the software will lengthen or shorten
the pipe length as needed to make the connection.

Move a straight pipe

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe feature that you want to move.
4. Set the Length Lock as needed.
5. Select Move To .
6. Identify the new location for the pipe.

 When you move a straight feature, such as a pipe, the default working plane is the plane of
one of the adjacent turns. The software selects the turn first by the plane that includes
branches, and then by the plane of larger nominal diameter.
 You can select one of the orientation handles that appear at the ends of the straight feature
as your move from point. These orientation handles allow you to move the pipe in relation to
the edge of the pipe instead of the pipe centerline. For example, you can use the orientation

Piping User's Guide 85

Moving Pipe Features

handles to align the bottom of pipe with the top of a beam. The display of the orientation
handles is controlled by the Key point option on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.
Unless you need them, we recommend that you keep the orientation handles turned off as
they can make selecting the end feature of a pipe challenging.

Move a turn
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the turn that you want to move.
4. Click Move To .
5. Identify the new location of the turn.
You can use the Angle box to type a new angle for the turn. The software moves the turn
along the pipe to the specified angle.

86 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 5

Editing Properties
All objects that compose a pipeline have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the pipeline object that you want to edit.

An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon.
The Locate Filter box contains the available, pre-defined filters for the Select command. When
you choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered
objects in a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Pipe
Runs, you can select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Piping task includes these filters:
Pipelines - Allows you to select only pipelines in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Piping Runs - Allows you to select only pipe runs in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Piping Features - Limits the selection of objects to only pipe features. Some examples of
features are straight features, such as pipe, and in-line component features, such as valves.
Piping Parts - Allows you to select in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, only the
individual pipe parts that are associated with a feature. For example, a valve feature might have
several parts: the valve body and the flanges.
Taps - Allows you to select only taps in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Welds - Allows you to select only welds in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Clamps - Allows you to select only clamps in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Connections - Allows you to select only connections in the graphic view. The software creates
a connection whenever a piping component is connected to another component, an equipment
nozzle, or a pipe.
Spools - Allows you to select only spools in a graphic view or on the Assembly tab in the
Workspace Explorer. You can break pipelines into spools using the Generate Spools
command.
Penetration Spools - Allows you to select only penetration spools. Before you can create
penetration spools, you must place a penetration plate in the Hangers and Supports task.
Equipment - Allows you to select only equipment in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
Piping Nozzle - Allows you to select only pipe nozzles in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
All - Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
More - Displays the Select Filter dialog box. The Select Filter dialog box displays all of the
simple filters that are set up to accept object type or system objects as discrimination data. You
can then select additional filters to add them to this list. Only the selection of filters is available;
all other options are disabled.
Use the Inside fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence.

Piping User's Guide 87

Editing Properties

Use the Inside/Overlapping fence command to select all objects entirely inside the fence
and those objects outside but touching the fence at some point.

Associating Features with a New Run

When you select multiple features and associate them with a new run by selecting <New Pipe
Run> from the Run list, the Create New Run dialog box is populated with all of the properties
belonging to the run associated with the selected features. If the existing run's properties do not
match the defaults specified in the system, a dialog box displays asking you whether you want
to retrieve these properties from the System, the Run, or None.

 If the initial set of features belongs to more than one run, the software checks if all of the
selected features belong to the same system. If they do, a dialog box displays asking if you
want to retrieve the properties from the System or None.
 If the features belong to different systems, the software displays the following message:
Selected features do not have common default run properties. Please review the run
properties to ensure they meet requirements.
 If the selected features are not contiguous, the software displays the following message:
Features being assigned to target run are not contiguous. Do you want to proceed
with this operation?
 This functionality works the same if you select an individual feature.

What do you want to do?

 Edit pipeline properties (on page 88)
 Edit pipe run properties (on page 89)
 Edit branch properties (on page 89)
 Edit straight pipe properties (on page 89)
 Edit turn feature properties (on page 89)
 Edit part properties (on page 90)

Edit pipeline properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Pipeline in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the pipeline to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

88 Piping User's Guide

 Editing Properties

Edit pipe run properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the pipe run to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

 You can edit the flow direction of the pipe run by clicking the flow direction indicator on the
pipe run and then selecting the new direction.
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Edit branch properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the branch, such as a tee, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the branch properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit branch properties.

Edit straight pipe properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the straight pipe to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Edit turn feature properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the turn to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

Piping User's Guide 89

Editing Properties

Edit part properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the part, such as a flange, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

90 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 6

Deleting Features
Just as you place features to place parts in your pipe run, you delete features to remove
unwanted parts. You cannot delete parts directly. The software attempts to maintain the design
integrity of the model by adjusting all previously connected features. The behavior of various
objects during deletion is detailed below:

Pipelines
 Deleting a pipeline deletes all pipe runs, features, and parts associated with that pipeline.
 The Piping task cuts the pipeline legs at all boundaries and creates gaps. The software
neither extends nor inserts a straight feature.

Pipe Runs
 Deleting the run deletes all features (and thereby all parts) belonging to the run.
 The Piping task cuts the pipe run legs at all boundaries and creates gaps. The software
neither extends nor inserts a straight feature.

Straight Features
 Deleting a straight feature does not remove the connected turn features.
 Deleting a straight feature also does not delete any adjacent branch features if the straight
feature is connected to the branch port of the feature. For tee-type branches, the system
leaves the Tee in place. Branching valves, instruments and piping specialties will not be
deleted in either of these cases mentioned above.
 Deletion of a straight feature adjacent to a split feature removes the split feature if no other
part is connected to the split feature.
 Deletion of a straight feature adjacent to a run change feature removes the run change
feature.
 If the straight feature connects to a component, the software does not delete the component
when the straight feature is deleted. However, any mating parts generated to facilitate
connection to the component are deleted.

Turn Features
 Straight features connected to the deleted turn extend to the turn point.
 Deleting a turn feature removes all adjacent run change features and mating parts.
 When a branch feature is adjacent to the turn feature, the software inserts a straight feature
to avoid deleting a branch.

Inline Components or Split Features

 If an inline component or split feature is deleted, the software deletes all mating parts. The
two connected straight features merge, forming one straight feature, provided they share the
same parent pipe run and the same nominal piping diameter (NPD).

Piping User's Guide 91

Deleting Features

What do you want to do?

 Delete a branch (on page 92)
 Delete a straight pipe (on page 92)
 Delete a component (on page 92)
 Delete a split (on page 92)
 Delete a turn (on page 93)
 Delete a pipe run (on page 93)
 Delete a pipeline (on page 93)

Delete a branch
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the branch to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a straight pipe

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe feature to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to delete.
4. Click Delete .
The software automatically deletes all mating components (flanges and gaskets, for
example) that were placed with the component that you deleted.

Delete a split
1. Click Select .
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the split or takedown joint to delete.
4. Click Delete .

92 Piping User's Guide

 Deleting Features

Delete a turn
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the turn to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a pipe run

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Runs in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipe run to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Delete a pipeline
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Pipelines in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the pipeline to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Piping User's Guide 93

Deleting Features

94 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 7

Insert Split
Divides the pipe into sections. You can use any split feature defined in the reference data,
such as a flange or a butt weld, to connect the two resulting pipes.

You can select this command while routing pipe, or select it after routing pipe to insert a split in
an existing pipe. If you select the Insert Split command and then select an existing pipe, you
have two options:
 You can have the software cut the pipe feature into two features that represent two pipe
parts joined by a weld joint or a takedown joint.
 You can have the software cut the pipe feature into two features that represent a single pipe
part using a feature break. When splitting using a feature break, no weld or connection is
placed so the two-features combined represent a single pipe part. By using a feature break,
you can stop heat-tracing, insulation, or a surface coating at an arbitrary location along the
pipe instead of at a weld or other break in the line.
You also have the option to place flange and butt weld splits in single-placement or
multi-placement mode. In multi-placement mode, you can select either pipe runs or straight
features and specify the distance between the splits. The default distance is the purchased pipe
length defined in the piping specification.
When you insert a takedown joint, the software automatically selects and positions the
necessary parts based on the split feature information in the pipe specification defined for the
pipe run. If you select a sleeved weld joint, the software automatically selects and positions the
sleeve. The software uses the reference data that defines specific parts for standard splits. The
allowed parts are generally a very restricted subset of the parts (flanges and sleeves) that are
allowed for general placement by the specification.
You can select an existing split and edit any part of the split feature definition by clicking the
appropriate ribbon control.
Special takedown joints not covered by the pipe specification split rules can be manually
created by inserting flange components using the Insert Component command. When you
place a flange manually as a component, the software automatically cuts the pipe and inserts
the appropriate mating part for the flange.

Insert Split Ribbon

Sets options for inserting splits into a pipe run.
Pipe Split Feature Properties - Opens the Pipe Split Feature Properties dialog box in
which you can define additional properties that are not available on the ribbon bar. For more
information, see Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 99).

Piping User's Guide 95

Insert Split

Select Feature - Selects the pipe in which you want to insert a split.
Enter Insertion Point - Defines the location to insert the split.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run to which the split belongs along with the names of all
other runs associated with the same pipeline parent. You can select another pipe run if needed.
You can select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent.
Weld Joint - Select this option when a welded joint is necessary.
Takedown Joint - Select this option when a takedown joint is necessary.
Feature Break - Select this option to place a feature break. Feature breaks are used to stop
heat-tracing, insulation, and coatings at arbitrary locations along a pipe without having to break
the pipe into two pipe parts.
Type - Select the type of split component to place. The software generates this list based on the
components allowed by the pipe specification for the selected pipe. You can also specify the
component that you want to use by selecting Specify Component Tag and then entering the
component tag. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on
defining pipe specifications.
Option - Displays the option of the selected split component. In addition, the Option list
contains any options defined in the pipe specification for the short code selected in the Type list.
Select another value from the Option list to update the object.
Finish - Places the splits using the parameters that you have specified.
Split Mode - Specifies whether to place a single split or multiple splits. Select Single Split to
place a single split or feature break at a specified location. Select Multi Split to place splits on
straight features at a specified distance apart. You can select a single straight feature or an
entire run in this mode. If you select an entire run, the splits are placed at the specified distance
apart on each individual straight feature in the run, but not across the entire run itself. The Multi
Split option will not place splits on bent pipe. Splits placed using the Multi Split option have no
relation to each other after placement. Feature breaks cannot be placed in the Multi Split mode.
Pipe Length - Enter the distance between the splits. The default distance is the purchased pipe
length defined in the piping specification. This option is only available when Split Mode is set to
Multi Split.
Reference - Select Start to measure the distance from the start end (the first end that was
placed) of the pipe. Select End to measure from the end of the pipe. This option is only available
when Split Mode is set to Multi Split.

Edit Split Feature Ribbon

Displays options for modifying a split in a pipe.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box. For more information, see Pipe Split
Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 99).
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the split is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Displays the name of the pipe run or runs that are adjacent to the selected split feature. If
two different runs are listed, you can specify either run as the owner of the split.
Weld Joint - Select this option to change the split to a welded joint.
Takedown Joint - Select this option to change the split to a takedown joint.
Type - Select the type of split. The software generates this list based on those components
allowed by the pipe specification for the selected pipe.

96 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Split

Option - Displays the option of the selected Type. Additionally, the Option list contains any
options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For
example, if two different rating are available in the piping specification for a flange short code
selected in the Type list, both options appear in this list. Selecting another value from the
Option list updates the object accordingly.

What do you want to do?

 Insert a welded split (on page 97)
 Insert a takedown joint (on page 97)
 Insert multiple splits a specified distance apart (on page 98)
 Insert a feature break (on page 98)
 Edit split properties (on page 98)
 Edit weld properties (on page 99)
 Move a split (on page 99)
 Move a feature break (on page 99)

Insert a welded split

1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Select the pipe to split.
4. Click Weld Joint on the ribbon.
5. Select the type and option for the split in the Type and Option boxes.
6. Click to define the position of the welded split.
You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the split.

Insert a takedown joint

1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Select the pipe to split.
4. Click Takedown on the ribbon.
5. Select the type and option for the split in the Type and Option boxes.
6. Click to define the position of the split.
You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the split.

Piping User's Guide 97

Insert Split

Insert multiple splits a specified distance apart

1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Multi Split.
3. Select the straight pipe or pipe run to split.
4. Click Takedown or Weld on the ribbon.
5. Select the type and option for the split in the Type and Option boxes.
6. In the Pipe Length box, enter the distance between the splits. The default distance is the
defined purchased pipe length in the piping specification to which the pipe run (or straight
pipe) belongs.
7. In the Reference box, select whether to measure the distance starting from the start of the
pipe run or the end of the pipe run.
8. Click Finish.

 Other than performing an immediate Undo, the multiple splits have no relationships between
them after placement.
 You cannot place feature-break splits while in multi-split mode.

Insert a feature break

1. Click Insert Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. For the Split Mode, select Single Split.
3. Click Feature Break on the ribbon.
4. Select the pipe feature to break.
5. Click to define the position of the feature break.

 You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to locate more
precisely the position of the feature break.
 When splitting using a feature break, no weld or connection is placed so the two- features
combined represent a single pipe part. By using a feature break, you can stop heat-tracing,
insulation, or a surface coating at an arbitrary location along the pipe instead of at a weld or
other break in the line.

Edit split properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the split to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit properties.

98 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Split

Edit weld properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Welds in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the weld to edit from the Workspace Explorer or in the model.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

Move a split
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the split or takedown joint to move.
4. Click Move From to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the split is the starting point.
5. Click Move To .
6. Move the split to a new location.
You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to help locate
the split more precisely.

Move a feature break

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the feature break to move.
4. Click Move on the main toolbar.
5. Click Move From to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the feature break is the starting point.
6. Click Move To .
7. Move the feature break to a new location.
You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to help locate
the feature break more precisely.

Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays split feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Split Properties (on page 98)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)
General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 100)

Piping User's Guide 99

Insert Split

General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the split feature.
Split features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe run
property, the corresponding split properties also automatically change.
Category - Pipe split properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and
Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. You can select the category to define values by
using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the split feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the split feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the split feature belongs. Other pipe runs in the same
system as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specifies the active pipe specification for the split feature. All the pipe
specifications that are allowed to be selected as the system parent of the pipe run appear for
selection. If appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which
the split feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification
from the pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specifies the nominal diameter (NPD) of the split feature. If appears in
the box, the NPD for the split feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the split feature
belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe
run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part
appears and cannot be changed.
Weld/Takedown Category - Select the category for the split.
Type - Displays the types of split features allowed by the selected Specification, Nominal
Diameter, and Weld/Takedown Category options. Split features are listed by short codes. You
can change the split feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box
displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available split features. The software generates this list based on the
pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you have
manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the split feature. The software selects the part
name using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override the
pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually, the
Nominal Diameter, Type, and Option properties are disabled.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the split has been correlated to a split in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the split is correlated to a P&ID split. Select Correlate object if
the split has a correlating split in a P&ID. Select No correlation is required if the split does not
have a correlating split in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the split is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the split topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the split data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None
if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

100 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Split

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define the insulation specifications that are available for the systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define the insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.

Piping User's Guide 101

Insert Split

Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 99)

102 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 8

Insert Component
Places components such as valves, steam traps, strainers, tees, turns, fire protection items,
and other piping specialty items. When inserting components, the software automatically splits
the pipe (straight or curved) and adds the necessary mating components when required. This
command also places surface mounted components (such as ultrasonic flow meters or
penetration sleeves) that do not split a pipe run.

You can add components either during the routing of a pipe run or after the pipe has been
routed.
The system uses the pipe specification, nominal diameter of the selected pipe run, and the
geometry of the insertion point to filter the available components. For example, if the insertion
point is not at the end of a pipe run or at an equipment nozzle, turn components are not included
in the list of available components. When you insert a component, the software generates any
mating and connection parts required to connect the inserted part to the adjacent objects.
When inserting components, you can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along
commands to position components precisely in a pipe run. You can select this command and
then select a component in a P&ID to correlate the component in the P&ID to the component in
your model.
If you specify that the component should be created as a new run by selecting <New
Pipe Run> from the Run list, the software populates the Create New Run dialog box with the
properties belonging to the existing run (that is, the run you selected in which to insert the
component). If the properties of the existing run do not match the defaults specified in the piping
system, the software displays a dialog box asking you if you want to use the properties of the
System, Run, or None.

Insert Component Ribbon

Sets options for adding a valve or other components into a pipe run.
Properties - Activates the Pipe Component Feature Properties dialog box. You can use
this dialog box to specify how the specifications of the component are defined. You can specify
component specifications in one of three ways:
 Select the pipe run into which the component is being placed.

Piping User's Guide 103

Insert Component

 Select a specification directly.

 Select the part specification in the catalog.
Select Straight or End Feature - Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle on which you want to
place a component.
Type - Displays a list of available component short codes based on the piping specification and
nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the insertion location. Select
the type of component that you want to insert. Select the <Specify Component Tag> option to
specify the component that you want to use by typing in the component tag. Also select
<Specify Component Tag> to place instrument specialty or piping specialty items, including
those available from retrieved Dimensional Data Sheet information.
Select <Default Branch> to place the default branch component as defined in the branch table.
Select <Default Turn> or <Default Reducer> to place the default turn or the default reducer as
defined in the piping specification. The <Default Turn> and <Default Reducer> options are
only available when you select a pipe end feature.
Option - Displays the option of the selected component. In addition, the Option drop down list
contains any options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the Type
list. Selecting a value from the Option list updates the objects. See Pipe Specifications in Piping
Reference Data Guide for more information on defining pipe specifications.
Enter Insertion Point - Positions the component that you are placing along the pipe that you
selected. You can use the Tools > Pinpoint and Tools > Point Along commands to define the
precise location of the component on the pipe run.
Finish - Places the component in the pipe run.
Run - Specifies to which pipe run the component belongs to. If the component that you are
placing is a branching or run change component, the software displays a list of run from which
you can select. If you need a new run, select <New Pipe Run>. For more information on
creating a pipe run, see New Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 70).
If you specify that the component should be created as a new run by selecting <New
Pipe Run> from the Run list, the software populates the Create New Run dialog box with the
properties belonging to the existing run (that is, the run you selected in which to insert the
component). If the properties of the existing run do not match the defaults specified in the piping
system, the software displays a dialog box asking you if you want to use the properties of the
System, Run, or None.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 70).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks to see if the run already exists in the SmartMarine 3D
model. If the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New
Pipe Run dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the
defaults. When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select <Select Graphically> to select an existing run in a graphic view, the Workspace
Explorer, or the P&ID View.
Name - Displays the name of the component being inserted.
Flip - Select this option to change the component port that is connected to the selected port.
If you are inserting a lateral, tee, or other tee-type branch into a length of pipe or between two
other components, only the inline ports of the component are available. However, if you insert
the same component at the end of a pipe or at a nozzle, all component ports are available.

104 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

Reference position - Slides the component that you are inserting so that its origin or selected
port is positioned at the insertion point. If the selected reference position does not lie along the
axis of the leg, then the software projects the position so that it intersects the axis and the
component slides so that the projected point is located at the insertion point.
Select Specify Reference Position to select in the graphics window a mating part, or an
associated port, that you want to use as the reference position. The Reference position box
updates with the name of the object that you selected.
Rotate - Select to rotate the component about the pipe interactively.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the component rotated about the pipe.
Operator Angle - Type an angle at which you want the valve operator to be rotated about the
valve stem. This angle does not affect the valve body.
Branch Position - Select which side of the pipe to place the non-radial tangential or
non-tangential component.

Edit Component Ribbon

Provides options for editing the components placed in the model.
Properties - Activates the properties dialog box for the selected component. See Pipe
Component Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 112) for more information.
Move From - Click to identify the origin of the move vector. If you do not define a starting
point, the software assumes the current location of the component is the starting point.
Move To - Click to identify the termination point of the move vector.
Run - Specifies the name of the pipe run in which the component is placed.
Type - Displays the short code associated with the selected component. In addition, the Type
list contains the short codes associated with any other components with similar geometry
defined in the piping specification for the current nominal diameter. Selecting an entry from the
Type list replaces the selected component with one of a different type.
Option - Displays the option of the selected component, if applicable. In addition, the Option list
contains any other options defined in the piping specification for the short code selected in the
Type list. For example, if two different rating values were available in the piping specification for
the short code selected in the Type list, both options would appear in this list. Selecting a value
from the Option list updates the object. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide
for more information on defining pipe specifications.
Name - Displays the name of the component that you are modifying. Type another name if
needed.
Flip - Select this option to change the component port that is connected to the selected port.
If you are inserting a lateral, tee, or other tee-type branch into a length of pipe or between two
other components, only the inline ports of the component are available. However, if you insert
the same component at the end of a pipe or at a nozzle, all component ports are available.

Piping User's Guide 105

Insert Component

Rotate - Select to rotate the component about the pipe interactively.

Angle - Type an angle at which you want the component rotated about the pipe.
Branch Position - Select the position of the branch centerline relative to the header centerline.
Select Radial to place the branch such that its centerline intersects the header centerline. Select
Non-Radial to place the branch such that its center line does not intersect the header
centerline. If you select Non-Radial, you can specify the distance the branch centerline is offset
from the header centerline up to being tangent to the outside diameter of the header.

Figure 1: Radial and Non-Radial Positions

Specify Component Tag Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the component that you want to use by the component tag. You activate
this dialog box by selecting the Insert Component command, and then selecting <Specify
Component Tag> from the Type option.
Source for Tags - Specifies the location of component tags in the Component Tag drop down
list.
 Catalog - Select this option to show components in the Catalog.
 Design Basis - Select this option to show components in the referenced Design Basis.
Honor Specification - Select this option to show components that are only valid for the piping
material class that the selected pipe is assigned.
Component tag - Type the tag of the component that you want to use. Select Browse
Instruments to place an instrument. Select Browse Piping Specialties to place a piping
specialty item. You can also specify the name of an instrument that was retrieved from
SmartPlant Electrical.

What do you want to do?

 Insert a component (on page 107)
 Insert a component while routing (on page 108)
 Insert an instrument (on page 108)
 Insert a piping specialty item (on page 108)
 Insert a surface mounted component (on page 109)
 Insert the default branch (on page 109)
 Insert the default turn (on page 109)
 Insert the default reducer (on page 110)
 Place a tee from a P&ID (on page 110)
 Place an elbolet (on page 110)
 Select component settings (on page 111)

106 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

 Edit component properties (on page 111)

 Move a component (on page 111)
 Rotate a component (on page 112)
 Rotate a component on a nozzle (on page 112)

Insert a component
1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the component. If
you select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. Select the component type and option in the Type and Option boxes.
4. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.
When placing components on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as
the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place a component at the mid-point of a pipe, for example. You can
set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert a component on a curved pipe

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the curved pipe on which to insert the component. The point at which you identify the
curved pipe is used as the placement point.
3. Select the component type and option in the Type and Option boxes.
4. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.
When placing components on a curved pipe, the software uses the divisor point location
as the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. You
can set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Piping User's Guide 107

Insert Component

Insert a component while routing

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the component type and option in the Type and Option boxes.
3. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
4. Click Finish.
5. Continue routing the pipe run.
When inserting components on the end feature of an arc pipe, you can use Arc Routing
or Straight Routing options on the Insert Component ribbon bar to control the orientation of the
pipe feature. If you select Arc Routing, then the inserted component is oriented such that you
can continue to route an arc pipe feature from the other end of it. If you select Straight Routing,
then the inserted component is oriented such that you can continue to route a straight pipe
feature from the other end of it.

Insert an instrument
1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle in which to insert the instrument specialty object. If you
select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type option, select Specify Component Tag.
4. In the Component Tag box, type the instrument tag or select Browse Instruments.
5. Select the instrument object to place.
6. Click Finish.
When placing instruments on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as the
placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place instruments at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You can set
the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert a piping specialty item

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, or nozzle in which to insert the piping specialty item. If you select
a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type option, select Specify Component Tag.
4. In the Component Tag box, type the object tag or select Browse piping specialty.
5. Select the piping specialty item to place.
6. Click Finish.
When placing piping specialty items on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point
location as the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the
pipe. This functionality allows you to place an item at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You
can set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

108 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

Insert a surface mounted component

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe on which to insert the surface mounted feature. The point at which you
identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. Select the surface mounted component short code and option in the Type and Option
boxes.
4. If needed, change the position of the component using the Reference Position, and Angle
options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.
You must bulkload the Sample Data for Surface Mounted Components using PCF.xls
workbook before you can place surface mounted components.

Insert the default branch

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe, pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the default branch. If
you select a pipe, the point at which you identify the pipe is used as the placement point.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Branch>.
4. In the Run box on the ribbon, define the pipe run for the branch by either selecting an
existing run or by using the New Pipe Run dialog box to create a new pipe run.
The software uses the branch table to place the correct default branch feature.
5. If needed, change the position of the component using Flip, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
6. Click Finish.
When placing components on a pipe, the software will use the divisor point location as
the placement point if the divisor point glyph is displayed when you select the pipe. This
functionality allows you to place a component at the mid-point of a pipe for example. You can
set the number of divisor points on the Tools > Options > SmartSketch tab.

Insert the default turn

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the default turn.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Turn>.
The software reads the piping specification to determine the default turn to use.
4. If needed, change the position of the turn using Turn Angle, Reference Position, and
Angle options on the ribbon.
5. Click Finish.

Piping User's Guide 109

Insert Component

Insert the default reducer

1. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the pipe end, component port, or nozzle on which to insert the component.
3. In the Type box on the ribbon, select <Default Reducer>.
4. In the Run box on the ribbon, define the new pipe run for the other side of the reducer.
The software reads the piping specification to determine the correct default reducer to place.
5. If needed, change the position of the component using Reference Position and Angle
options on the ribbon.
6. Click Finish.

Place a tee from a P&ID

1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the pipe runs for
that branch. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains pipe runs.
3. Review the P&ID to determine where you need to insert the tee or branch in the model.
Specifically, you need to identify the header and branch pipe runs.
4. Click Insert Component on the vertical toolbar.
5. Select the header run in which to insert the tee or other branch component.
6. Select the component type and the option in the Type and Option boxes.
7. Position the component on the header pipe run.
8. Click Finish.
9. Using the Route Pipe command, route the branch pipe run into the branch component
that you just placed on the header pipe run.
As you model and branch into a header line, a tee is automatically generated by the
software.

Place an elbolet
1. Click Insert Tap .
2. Select the elbow on which to place the elbolet.
3. From the Option list, select a tap size that is the same size as the elbolet's first size.
4. Click Finish.
5. Click Insert Component .
6. Select the tap that you just placed on the elbow.
7. From the Type list, select Elbolet.
8. Click Finish.

110 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

Select component settings

1. Click Properties on the ribbon.
2. If needed, select the type and option for the component in the Type and Option boxes.
Other properties can be modified as needed.
3. Place the component.
The Configuration tab and Relationship tab of the properties dialog box are available
only when you edit an existing object.

Edit component properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the component properties.

 Use the Rotate option on the ribbon bar to dynamically rotate the component. Use the
Angle option to type the rotation angle.
 You also can click Properties on the ribbon to edit component properties.

Move a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to move.
4. Click Move To .
5. Specify the new component location.

 If you do not select a move from location, the current location of the object is used as the
from location.
 You can use the Tools > Point Along and Tools > Pinpoint commands to locate the
component precisely.

Piping User's Guide 111

Insert Component

Rotate a component
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Piping Features in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the component, such as a valve, to rotate.
4. Click Rotate and move the mouse to rotate the component.
5. Click to release the component at the new rotation angle.
You also can enter a rotation angle in the Angle box.

Rotate a component on a nozzle

1. In the Locate Filter, select Piping Features.
2. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
3. Select the end feature (that is not connected to the nozzle) on the component to rotate.
4. Lock the plane control to a plane that is perpendicular to the axis of rotation.
5. Lock the length control.
6. Click Move To .
7. Move the cursor to rotate the component.

Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for component features, such as valves, for review and editing.
Edit Split Properties (on page 98)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 112)

General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays and defines the general properties of the component feature.
Component features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the
pipe run property, the corresponding component properties also changes automatically.
Category - Component properties are divided into different categories: All, Standard,
Insulation and Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. You can select the category to
define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the component feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the component feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the component feature belongs. Other pipe runs in
the same system as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specifies the active pipe specification for the component feature. All pipe
specifications that are allowed for the system parent of the pipe run appear for selection. If
appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the component

112 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specifies the nominal diameter (NPD) of the component feature. If
appears in the box, the NPD for the component feature is inherited from the pipe run to which
the component feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe
specification from the pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the
NPD of the selected part appears as a read-only value.
Type - Displays the types of component features allowed by the selected Specification and
Nominal Diameter. Component features are listed by short codes. You can change the
component feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part
selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available component features. The software generates this list based
on the pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you
have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be
changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the component feature. The software selects the
part name using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the component has been correlated to a component in a
P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the component is correlated to a P&ID component. Select
Correlate object if the component has a correlating component in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the component does not have a correlating component in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the component is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the topology mismatch of components can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the data and topology mismatches of components can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation

Piping User's Guide 113

Insert Component

material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.

114 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Component

Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.

Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Piping User's Guide 115

Insert Component

116 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 9

Insert Tap
Places a tap on components in the model. Use this command when you need a tap for a
drain, vent, or instrument connection. You can place taps on all piping components; elbows,
tees, caps, valves, pipes, pipe bends, and so forth; except for mating parts.

Insert Tap Ribbon

Sets options for adding a tap to a valve or other component.
Select Part - Select the component in which you want to place the tap. You can select any
piping component; elbow, pipe bend, tee, cap, valve, pipe, and so forth; except a mating part.
Option - Displays a list of available tap sizes that you can place in the selected component. The
software generates this list based on the pipe specification of the component into which you are
inserting the tap. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Finish - Places the tap in the component.
Distance - Specify the distance along the component between the tap and the specified
reference position on the component.
If Orientation is set to perpendicular, the distance is measured along the length of the
component path as shown on the valve below. For pipe bends, the distance is measured from
the reference port to the tap location along the arc of the turn feature.
If Orientation is set to parallel, the distance is measured from the specified reference point and
at the specified angle as shown on the blind flange below.

Piping User's Guide 117

Insert Tap

Orientation - Defines whether the tap is perpendicular (A) or parallel (B) to the selected
component. This option is available only when you select an end feature (cap, blind flange, and
so forth) or a turn feature (such as an elbow or pipe bend) as the component. For straight pipes
and tubes, and the straight sections of a pipe bend, the orientation is always set to
perpendicular. For pipe bends, the tap is always placed perpendicular to the flow direction
throughout the turn.

Reference position - Specifies the port on the component from which to measure the distance
to the tap.
Rotate - Select to rotate the tap about the component interactively.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the tap rotated about the component.

Edit Tap Ribbon

Changes options for taps placed in the model.
Option - Displays a list of available tap sizes that you can place in the selected component. The
software generates this list based on the pipe specification of the component on which you
inserted the tap. See Pipe Specifications in Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Distance - Specify the distance along the component between the tap and the specified
reference position on the component.
If Orientation is set to perpendicular, the distance is measured along the length of the
component path as shown on the valve below. For pipe bends, the distance is measured from
the reference port to the tap location along the arc of the turn feature.
If Orientation is set to parallel, the distance is measured from the specified reference point and
at the specified angle as shown on the blind flange below.

Orientation - Defines whether the tap is perpendicular (A) or parallel (B) to the path passing
through the port. This option is available only when you select an end feature (cap, blind flange,
and so forth) or a turn feature (such as an elbow) as the component. For straight pipes and
tubes, and the straight sections of a pipe bend, the orientation is always set to perpendicular.
For pipe bends, the tap is always placed perpendicular to the flow direction throughout the turn.

118 Piping User's Guide

 Insert Tap

Reference position - Specifies the port on the component from which to measure the distance
to the tap.
Rotate - Select to rotate the tap about the component interactively.
Angle - Type an angle at which you want the tap to be rotated about the component.

What do you want to do?

 Insert a tap (on page 119)
 Move a tap (on page 119)
 Rotate a tap (on page 119)
 Edit tap properties (on page 120)
 Delete a tap (on page 120)

Insert a tap
1. Click Insert Tap on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the cap, elbow, tee, pipe, or other component in which to insert the tap. You cannot
select a mating part.
3. Select the tap ID in the Option box.
4. If necessary, select a reference position other than the default. As the cursor moves over
each entry in the list, the corresponding position highlights in the 3D model view.
5. Optionally, enter a distance relative to the reference position to place the tap.
6. Rotate the tap, if necessary.
7. Click Finish.

Move a tap
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Taps in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the tap to move.
4. Enter a new distance, orientation, or rotation value.

Rotate a tap
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Taps in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the tap to rotate.
4. Click Rotate and move the mouse to rotate the tap.
You also can enter a rotation angle in the Angle box.

Piping User's Guide 119

Insert Tap

Edit tap properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Taps in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the tap to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.

Delete a tap
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Taps in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the tap to delete.
4. Click Delete on the toolbar.

Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays tap feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Tap Properties (on page 120)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)

120 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 10

Route Flex Pipe

Places a flexible pipe between two nozzles or ports that you identify. The two nozzles/ports
must be either:
 Parallel and facing each other but at different elevations, or
 At an angle to each other, but the center-lines are co-planar.

Limitations
 You cannot modify the individual parts for the flex pipe. You must edit the flex pipe feature
as a whole run.
 You cannot split flex pipe.
 You cannot place components in a flex pipe.

Route Flex Pipe Ribbon

Sets options for routing flexible pipe.
Pipe Properties - Opens the Pipe Properties dialog box in which you can define additional
properties that are not available on the ribbon bar. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 70).
Start Point - Select the starting pipe end feature, pipe port, or equipment nozzle.
End Point - Select the terminating pipe end feature, pipe port, or equipment nozzle.
Run - Displays existing pipe runs along with the <New Pipe Run>, <New/Continue Run>,
<Select from P&ID>, and More options. Select the pipe run to route or select <New Pipe Run>
to create a new pipe run to route. If a new pipe run is created, all runs associated with the parent
pipeline selected on the New Pipe Run dialog box appear in the list.
Select <New/Continue Pipe Run> to automatically extend an existing pipe run by selecting the
end feature of that pipe run. If a run is continued, all runs associated with the pipeline parent of
the continued run appear in the list. If you do not select an end feature, the New Pipe Run
dialog box automatically activates to create a pipe run. For more information, see New Pipe Run
Dialog Box (on page 70).
Select <Select from P&ID> to graphically select a run in a P&ID to route. When you select the
run in the P&ID, the software checks to see if the run already exists in the SmartMarine 3D
model. If the run does exist, the current run is set to that run. If the run does not exist, the New
Pipe Run dialog box displays using values from the run that you selected in the P&ID as the
defaults. When you click OK, the run is created, and then correlated to the run in the P&ID.
Select More to select a pipe run that is associated with a different pipeline parent. For more
information, see Select Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 79).
Assembly Tag - Select the connection option for the flexible pipe.
Assembly Option - Select the assembly option.
Finish - Places the flexible pipe using the parameters that you have specified.
Angle - Displays the angle of the flex hose.
Bend Radius - Displays the bend radius of the flex hose.

Piping User's Guide 121

Route Flex Pipe

What do you want to do?

 Route a flexible pipe (on page 122)
 Route a flexible pipe from a P&ID run (on page 122)

Route a flexible pipe

1. Click Route Flex Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the run starting point.

 If you select an equipment nozzle, the software prompts you to create a new pipe run.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.
3. On the New Flex Pipe Run dialog box, type a name. If you do not enter a name, the
software automatically generates a name.
Select Pipe Run Settings (on page 66)
New Pipe Run Dialog Box (on page 70)
4. Click OK to close the New Flex Pipe Run dialog box.
5. Select the ending point of the flexible pipe.

 If the piping specification that you selected has service limits defined, you must define at
least one temperature value and one pressure value for the pipe run. Do this by selecting
Temperature and Pressure from the Category option.

Route a flexible pipe from a P&ID run

Your plant must be registered with the SmartPlant integrated environment to use this
procedure.
1. Click SmartPlant > Retrieve to retrieve the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you
want to route. You can skip this step if the P&ID has already been retrieved.
2. Click SmartPlant > View P&ID to view the P&ID drawing that contains the run that you want
to route.
3. Click Route Flex Pipe on the vertical toolbar.
4. In the Run pull-down list on the ribbon bar, select <Select from P&ID>.
5. Select the run to route from the P&ID drawing.
6. The New Flex Pipe Run dialog box appears with properties populated from the design
basis. Click OK to accept the properties given. This step saves the correlated run
information and closes the New Flex Pipe Run dialog box.
7. Select the starting location of the flexible pipe.

 If process data was not defined on the P&ID, then you must manually enter a
temperature and pressure.
 If you select an equipment nozzle that is correlated with P&ID design basis data, the
software automatically determines which run should be connected.
8. Select the ending location of the flexible pipe.

122 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 11

Spooling
Spools are collections of piping parts and the welds that hold them together. The software
creates these spool assemblies by applying a set of rules that breaks the assemblies into pieces
of a pipeline system. Each piece ends with a spool-breaking component or connection type.
After a pipeline, block, or WBS item is spooled, the pipeline, block, or WBS item becomes the
parent object of the spools. This process allows spools to be named after the pipeline, block, or
WBS item and keeps track of spools that may be out of date, based on the modification date of
the parent object.
There are two types of spools. Standard spools are based solely upon the pipeline that contains
the spools and a set of spooling rules. Penetration spools can include parts from one or more
pipeline systems. Each of the penetration spools is welded to a common penetration plate.
Generate Spools and Create Penetration Spools provide a dialog box on which you
can select objects for spooling. Each spool must consist of connected objects for the spooling to
occur without errors. After generating the spools, the software stores them in the Model
database and displays the spools on the Assembly tab in the Workspace Explorer.
After a spool is generated, the spool can be used to create an isometric drawing for fabrication.
These drawings, typically referred to as spool sheets, are tied to the spool and are marked as
being out-of-date if the spool is subsequently modified. The spool information can also be
included on erection (construction) isometrics. To display the latest spool information on
isometric drawings, set the option for showing spool piece identifiers for an isometric drawing
style. Then, extract some test drawings using the updated isometric drawing style.

What Spools Include

The software includes in spools any piping component or piece of pipe that is assigned a
fabrication type of by fabricator. Implied objects (such as bolts, nuts, and gaskets) that are
associated with these parts are not included in spools. You can specify options to include an
entire pipe support or pipe support parts in the same spool as the components to which they are
welded. The supports must have the fabrication requirement set to by fabricator, the fabrication
type set to shop fabricated, and the fabrication responsibility set to by piping. These are set in
the support properties dialog box under the Fabrication and Construction and Responsibility
categories on the General tab.
Additionally, the software provides the ability to create penetration spools, which are used in
marine and offshore projects. In penetration spools, multiple piping spools are included in the
assembly along with the common penetration plate to which they are attached.

Where Spools Break

When the software processes a pipeline system, spools are created by identifying components
or end-preparations that represent intrinsic breaks in the line. The software always breaks
spools at field welds, bolted connections, and compression fittings. You can specify whether or
not spools break at unions.
In addition, you can place control points at connection objects using the Insert > Control Point
command to break spools along the pipeline. You have the option to break only at control points,
break at control points and intrinsic breaks, or to ignore control points. For more information, see
the Spool Break by Control Point information in Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box) (on
page 127).

Piping User's Guide 123

Spooling

If the software finds a gap when processing a pipeline system, the software breaks the spool
and proceeds with processing the remainder of the pipeline.

How Spools Are Named

The software uses a default naming rule to give each spool a unique name. The default spool
name contains a prefix based on the spool parent and a mark number. The mark number
ensures that the spool name is unique and to provide a sequencing of spools within a pipeline.
You can modify the naming rules to match your company needs. For more information about
naming rules, see the SmartMarine 3D Reference Data Guide available from the Help >
Printable Guides command.
You also can interactively change the name of a spool by selecting it, displaying the Properties
dialog box, and typing a different name.

Changing the Spooling Basis

You can base your spools on pipelines, planning blocks, or WBS items depending on your
needs. If you need to change the spooling basis after spooling has begun, we recommend that
you delete any existing spools, change the spooling basis, and then create new spools using the
new spooling basis.
To change the spooling basis, in Microsoft Excel, open the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlant\3D\CatalogData\Bulkload\Datafiles\BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls workbook. On the
PipeMfgSpoolRule sheet in the SpoolingBasis column, enter 0 to spool by pipelines, 1 to
spool by planning blocks, or 2 to spool by WBS items. In column A of that row, be sure to put an
M to indicate that you have modified the line. Save and exit the workbook. Bulkload the
workbook to your catalog using the Add, modify, or delete records in existing catalog option.

Specifying Oversized Spools

At creation time, the software checks the size of each spool against the maximum length, height,
and width spool dimensions that you can specify. The default values in the reference data are
40 feet by 8 feet by 8 feet, and you can temporarily change these values if required. To change
the dimension values permanently, edit options on the PipeMfgSpoolRule sheet in the
BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls workbook and then bulk load the workbook into the catalog.
The software marks spools that exceed the maximum size as oversized so that the designer can
insert additional breaks as needed. This check helps to ensure the spools that require dipping in
a tank for galvanization, descaling and pickling, and so forth will actually fit in the immersion
tank. Also, spools can be marked oversized that are too large to fit in fabrication equipment such
as bending machines or annealing ovens, or are too large for shipping. You can check for
oversized spools in the following ways:
 View the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer. The icon for an oversized spool
contains .
 Click File > Define Workspace and view the Assembly tab on the Filter Properties dialog
box. Again, the icon for an oversized spool contains .
 View the Properties dialog box for the spool. The SpoolOversizedFlag property on the
Occurrence tab is set to True if the spool is oversized.

Updating Spools
The software uses a detailed change management routine that prevents existing spools from
being arbitrarily renumbered. When a pipeline is re-spooled, only the portion of the pipeline that
has changed is impacted by the changes to its spools. New spools are only created as needed
and existing spools do not lose their numbers (even if the result is that the numbers are now out
of sequence within the pipeline). Existing spools are only deleted as required. This change

124 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

management ensures that spools are not needlessly modified and that spool sheets are not
marked as being out-of-date unless that is absolutely the case.

Deleting Spools
You can delete spools by selecting them on the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer and
then selecting Delete . The piping parts that were assigned to the deleted spool are
reassigned to the deleted spool assembly's parent object. In addition, the software automatically
deletes a spool when the last part in the spool is deleted.

Generate Spools
Breaks pipelines into spools. You can view the spools on the Assembly tab in the
Workspace Explorer.
Spool Generation Dialog Box (on page 126)
Spool Properties Dialog Box (on page 129)

What do you want to do?

 Create spools (on page 125)
 Edit spool properties (on page 125)
 Delete a spool (on page 126)

Create spools
1. On the vertical toolbar, click Generate Spools .
2. Select the Spooling tab.
3. Select the pipelines, planning blocks, or WBS items to spool.
Use the WBS Item Type and WBS Item Purpose boxes to aid in the selection of WBS
items to spool.
4. Select the Options tab.
5. Review the spooling options and edit, if needed.
6. Click OK.
7. Select the Log tab.
8. Review the spooling log. Click Save Log to save the log to a text file, if needed.

 After spooling, you can view the spools on the Assembly tab in the Workspace Explorer.
 To show spool identification numbers on an isometric drawing, set Drawing > Content >
Show Spool ID to True in the Isometric Style Options Browser.
 See Spooling (on page 123) for how to switch between spooling pipelines, spooling planning
blocks, and spooling WBS items.

Edit spool properties

1. On the Assembly tab in the Workspace Explorer, select a spool, either a standard spool
or a penetration spool.
To create standard piping spools, click Generate Spools. To create penetration
spools, click Create Penetration Spools.

Piping User's Guide 125

Spooling

2. Click Edit > Properties.

3. Edit the properties as necessary.
The SpoolOversizedFlag property on the Occurrence tab is set to Yes if the spool is
oversized.

Delete a spool
1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In the Locate Filter, select Spools.
3. Select the Assembly tab of the Workspace Explorer.
4. Select the spool to delete. You can also select the spool in the model.
5. Click Delete .

 Parts that were assigned to the deleted spool are automatically reassigned to the deleted
spool's parent object in the Workspace Explorer.
 The software automatically deletes a spool when the last part in the spool is deleted.
 If you delete an existing spool, sequencing does not reuse the deleted ID.

Spool Generation Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the pipeline systems, planning blocks, or WBS items that you want to
spool. You use this dialog box when generating standard spools. If you want to generate
penetration spools, click the Generate Penetration Spools command.
OK - Processes the pipelines into spools using the options that you specify.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Save Log - Saves the information on the Log tab to a text file. For more information, see Log
Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box) (on page 129).
Refresh Options from Catalog - Reloads the spool options that are defined in the catalog to
the Options Tab. For more information, see Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box) (on
page 127).

Spooling Tab
Allows you to select the objects that you want to spool. For the Generate Spools command,
you can choose pipeline systems, planning blocks, or WBS items. For the Generate
Penetration Spools command, you can choose penetration plates.
If you spool by WBS items, two additional drop-down items for WBS Item Type and WBS Item
Purpose appear on the Spooling tab. While you are not required to set these options before
spooling, the drop-down options provide you with the ability to spool WBS items based on the
type and purpose. For example, if you select a WBS Item Type of "Design Area" and a WBS
Item Purpose of "Piping," the WBS items with this particular type and purpose are automatically
selected in the tree view, allowing you to spool only these WBS items.
See Also
Generate Spools (on page 125)
Spooling (on page 123)
Delete a Spool (on page 126)
Create Spools (on page 125)

126 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box)

Displays the spooling options to use. Each time you open the session file all spooling options
default to the spool settings saved in the catalog. You can change the spooling options if
needed for a special situation, but you cannot save your changes to the catalog or to the
session file. The next time you open your session file, the spool options default to the catalog
settings.
If you need to change the spooling options in the catalog, edit options on the
PipeMfgSpoolRule sheet in the BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls workbook and then bulk load the
workbook into the catalog.
Name Rule - Specifies the naming rule for spools.
Break Spools at Union - Specifies that the software breaks the spools at unions. The union
part must have its Commodity Type property set to "Union" for the spooling software to
recognize the union as a break point.
Include Stub Ins with Header Spool - Specifies that a spool can include the stub-in pipe and
all the parts of this stub-in branch until the first spool-breaking component is encountered. For
example, by setting this option to True, the software spools the stub-in and flange for the
isometric drawing with Pipeline_001 even though the stub-in and flange do not belong to
Pipeline_001. When creating isometric drawings for Pipeline_001 in the Drawings and Reports
task, you must use the Isometric Style Options Browser to set the
Drawing.Content.HonorSpoolAtBranch option to True.

Include Items Welded to Pipe in Spools - Includes welded objects, such as pipe hanger or
support parts, in the same spool as the components to which they are welded. Surface mounted
components are included in the spool if the fabrication type for the surface mounted component
is set to "By Fabricator".
Delete Existing Spools - Changes the spool numbering only at modified or added piping. When
a drawing is re-extracted, the software recalls the repeated data to avoid changing drawing split
points and part, weld, and spool numbers.
This setting guarantees that the software applies the same piece marks (spool names) to
spools, even if spools are regenerated.
Ignore Boundaries of Object Being Spooled - When set to False, the software will not cross
the boundary of the pipeline or block. When set to True, the software will cross the boundary of
the pipeline or block for spool generation until an intrinsic spool break is found. This feature is
intended for use when spooling by block.
To use this option correctly, you need to understand the concept of intrinsic breaks. The
spooling software starts a new spool any time it hits an intrinsic break:

Piping User's Guide 127

Spooling

 extents of the collection being spooled (pipeline or assembly)

 bolted connection
 (field) welded connection
 change in fabrication category from shop to field
 union (optional controlled by the Break Spools at Union option described previously)
 clamped connections
The extent of the collection being spooled is the most important intrinsic break condition. If a
pipeline is spooled, the software breaks the spool at the end of the pipeline regardless of what is
there. Normally, there is no conflict with the other intrinsic break conditions; however, a conflict
can occasionally happen. For example, it does not matter if the pipeline is connected to another
pipeline by a shop weld (which would normally not be a spool break), the software will still start a
new spool at this point.
In listing the intrinsic breaks in order of importance, the extent of the collection being spooled
should always be at the top because it normally trumps any other intrinsic break condition if a
conflict arises. Whatever is being spooled, pipeline or block, is the "basket of parts" with which
the spool software works. The software does not go outside of that basket for any reason unless
the Ignore Boundaries of Object Being Spooled is set to True. In that case, the spool
software steals connected parts from outside of its basket until it hits an intrinsic break, an open
end, or it runs out of parts. The spool software will not steal a part from outside the provided
basket if that part already belongs to another spool.
In other words, to turn off the first intrinsic break, set Ignore Boundaries of Object Being
Spooled to True.
Maximum Spool Length - Provides the maximum length of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Maximum Spool Width - Provides the maximum width of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Maximum Spool Height - Provides the maximum height of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Spool Break By Control Point - Specifies if spools should break at control points.
You can place control points using the Insert > Control Point command. You must set the
control point Subtype to Spool Break in order to use the control point with this option. In
addition, the control point must be placed on the connection object. Use QuickPick to verify that
you have selected the connection object when placing the control point for the spool break.

Select Ignore Control Points to ignore the control points during spooling. Select Break at
Control Points to break spools at the normal intrinsic line breaks and at control points. Select
Break Only at Control Points to break spools only at control points.

128 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

See Also
Generate Spools (on page 125)
Spooling (on page 123)
Delete a Spool (on page 126)
Create Spools (on page 125)

Log Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box)

Displays a log of the last pipe spooling process. You can save the log to a text file by clicking
Save Log. The log is divided into four parts:
Before - Lists all the spools that existed in the model before you ran the last spooling process.
This is the same list of spools that displays if you select this tab before processing spools.
To Do List - Lists spools that have objects in the To Do List. The spools cannot be created until
you fix the objects on the To Do List. Click View > To Do List (or press CTRL+T) to view the
To Do List.
Modified - Lists all the spools that were modified during the last spooling process.
New - Lists all the spools that were created during the last spooling process.
You can select a spool, pipe, or pipe component in the list to highlight it in the model.
See Also
Generate Spools (on page 125)
Spooling (on page 123)
Delete a Spool (on page 126)
Create Spools (on page 125)

Spool Properties Dialog Box

Displays information about a piping spool. You can create spools using the Generate Spools
command.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog Box) (on page 129)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)

Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog Box)

Displays instance-specific information about the spool.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the object. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for spools.

Standard
Displays all the occurrence properties for the spool as defined in the reference data.
Name - Specifies the name of the spool.
Name Rule - Displays how the object was named. If set to Default Name Rule, the software
named the object using the default naming rule of <parent pipeline system>_Spool<sequence
number>. For example, 1001-P_Spool1 is the first spool of pipeline system 1001-P. If set to
User Defined, you, or someone else, named the object manually.
Sequence ID - Displays the spool sequence ID.

Piping User's Guide 129

Spooling

Spool Oversize Flag - Displays True if the spool is oversized. Displays False if the spool is not
oversized. The spool size is set on the Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box) (on page
127).

Create Penetration Spools

Creates penetration spools. This special type of spool consists of one or more spools
connected with a penetration plate. There is a tight connection between the spools and the plate
part using a penetration plate created in the Hangers and Supports task. You can view the
penetration spools on the Assembly tab in the Workspace Explorer.
Before you can generate penetration spools, you must have at least one
penetration plate in the model. Switch to the Hangers and Supports task and use the Place
Support by Structure command. For more information about placing penetration plates in the
model, see the Hangers and Supports User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software.
See Also
Generate Penetration Spools Dialog Box (on page 130)
Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box (on page 132)

Create penetration spools

Before you can generate penetration spools, you must have at least one
penetration plate in the model. Switch to the Hangers and Supports task and use the Place
Support by Structure command. For more information about placing penetration plates in the
model, see the Hangers and Supports User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software.
1. On the vertical toolbar, click Create Penetration Spools .
2. Select the Spooling tab.
3. Select a penetration plate for spooling.
4. Click OK.

 You must have one penetration plate only per pipeline system before penetration spooling
can take place. If you have more than one plate connected to the pipe, the software displays
an error message.
 After spooling, you can view the spools on the Assembly tab in the Workspace Explorer.
 To show spool identification numbers on an isometric drawing, set Drawing > Content >
Show Spool ID to True in the Isometric Style Options Browser.

Generate Penetration Spools Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the penetration plate that you want to spool. You use this dialog box when
generating penetration spools. The dialog box includes the following tabs:
Spooling Tab (on page 126)
Options Tab (Penetration Spool Generation Dialog Box) (on page 131)

130 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

Spooling Tab
Allows you to select the objects that you want to spool. For the Generate Spools command,
you can choose pipeline systems, planning blocks, or WBS items. For the Generate
Penetration Spools command, you can choose penetration plates.
If you spool by WBS items, two additional drop-down items for WBS Item Type and WBS Item
Purpose appear on the Spooling tab. While you are not required to set these options before
spooling, the drop-down options provide you with the ability to spool WBS items based on the
type and purpose. For example, if you select a WBS Item Type of "Design Area" and a WBS
Item Purpose of "Piping," the WBS items with this particular type and purpose are automatically
selected in the tree view, allowing you to spool only these WBS items.
See Also
Generate Spools (on page 125)
Spooling (on page 123)
Delete a Spool (on page 126)
Create Spools (on page 125)

Options Tab (Penetration Spool Generation Dialog Box)

Displays the spooling options to use. Each time you open the session file all spooling options
default to the spool settings saved in the catalog. You can change the spooling options if
needed for a special situation, but you cannot save your changes to the catalog or to the
session file. The next time you open your session file, the spool options default to the catalog
settings.
If you need to change the spooling options in the catalog, edit options on the
PipeMfgSpoolRule sheet in the BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls workbook and then bulk load the
workbook into the catalog.
Name Rule - Specifies the naming rule for spools.
Break Spools at Union - Specifies that the software breaks the spools at unions. The union
part must have its Commodity Type property set to "Union" for the spooling software to
recognize the union as a break point.
Include Stub Ins with Header Spool - Specifies that a spool can include the stub-in pipe and
all the parts of this stub-in branch until the first spool-breaking component is encountered.
Include Items Welded to Pipe in Spools - Includes welded objects, such as pipe hanger or
support parts, in the same spool as the components to which they are welded.
Delete Existing Spools - Changes the spool numbering only at modified or added piping. When
a drawing is re-extracted, the software recalls the repeated data to avoid changing drawing split
points and part, weld, and spool numbers. This setting guarantees that the software applies the
same piece marks (spool names) to spools, even if spools are regenerated.
Ignore Boundaries of Object Being Spooled - When set to False, the software will not cross
the boundary of the pipeline or block. When set to True, the software will cross the boundary of
the pipeline or block for spool generation until an intrinsic spool break is found. This feature is
intended for use when spooling by block.
To use this option correctly, you need to understand the concept of intrinsic breaks. The
spooling software starts a new spool any time it hits one of the following intrinsic breaks:
 extents of the collection being spooled (pipeline or assembly)
 bolted connection
 (field) welded connection
 change in fabrication category from shop to field

Piping User's Guide 131

Spooling

 union (optional controlled by the Break Spools at Union option described above)
 clamped connections
The "extent of the collection being spooled" is the most important intrinsic break condition. If a
pipeline is spooled, the software breaks the spool at the end of the pipeline regardless of what is
there. Normally, there is no conflict with the other intrinsic break conditions; however, a conflict
can occasionally happen.
For example, it does not matter if the pipeline is connected to another pipeline by a shop weld
(which would normally not be a spool break); the software still starts a new spool at this point. In
listing the intrinsic breaks in order of importance, the "extents of the collection being spooled"
should always be at the top because it normally trumps any other intrinsic break condition if a
conflict arises. Whatever is being spooled, pipeline or block, is the "basket of parts" that the
spool software works with. The software does not go outside of that basket for any reason
unless the Ignore Boundaries of Object Being Spooled is set to True. In that case, the spool
software steals connected parts from outside of its basket until it hits an intrinsic break, an open
end, or it runs out of parts. The spool software will not steal a part from outside the provided
basket if that part already belongs to another spool.
Setting Ignore Boundaries of Object Being Spooled to True, turns off the first intrinsic
break rule from the previous list.
Maximum Spool Length - Provides the maximum length of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Maximum Spool Width - Provides the maximum width of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Maximum Spool Height - Provides the maximum height of a spool for oversizing calculation
purposes. You should enter ft (feet) for the units. If you specify units other than feet, the
software uses meters as the units.
Spool Break By Control Point - Specifies if spools should break at control points. You can
place control points using the Insert > Control Point command. You must set the control point
Subtype to Spool Break in order to use the control point with this option.
Select Ignore Control Points to ignore the control points during spooling. Select Break at
Control Points to break spools at the normal intrinsic line breaks and at control points. Select
Break Only at Control Points to break spools only at control points.
See Also
Generate Spools (on page 125)
Spooling (on page 123)
Delete a Spool (on page 126)
Create Spools (on page 125)

Penetration Spool Properties Dialog Box

Displays information about a penetration spool. You create penetration spools using the Create
Penetration Spools command.
Occurrence Tab (on page 152)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)

132 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

Check Manufacturability Command

Tool > Check Manufacturability analyzes objects in the current workspace and reports the
objects that will be difficult or impossible to manufacture according to standards defined in the
reference data.

Piping Checks
The piping manufacturability checking process includes software simulators for cutting, bending,
and coating pipe.
An XML data file controls the piping simulators. You can customize this file to reflect the
requirements, standards, and equipment of your facility. For assistance with customizing the
XML data file, contact Intergraph Support http://support.intergraph.com
(http://support.intergraph.com).
The equipment specified in the XML data includes the following:
 Work Center - The place where manufacturing work is performed. A Work Center contains
one or more Work Stations.
 Work Station - The place within a Work Center where manufacturing work is performed. A
Work Station is usually a specific piece of machinery or where assembly is done.
 Rotary Pipe Bender - A rotary pipe bending machine that bends pipe and tubing by pulling
it around a bend die.
 Pipe Bend Die - A die for bending a pipe of a particular diameter to a specific bend radius.
 Pipe Internal Sprayer - A machine capable of spraying a treatment or coating on the
internal pipe sections.
 Treatment Tank - A tank in which a pipe may be immersed to apply the desired treatment,
such as coating.
 Pipe Flange Welder - A machine that welds a flange to the end of a pipe.
The checking process performs the following checks:
 Pipe Length - Verifies that the pipe length is within minimum and maximum allowed limits.
 Pipe Bending - Verifies that the pipe can be bent on the available bending machines.
 Pipe Complexity - Checks the number of bends and the number of branches against the
company standard.
 Treatment Tank - Verifies that the spool will fit in the treatment tank.
 Flange Welding - Determines if flanges can be welded with an automatic flange welder.
 Inside Grinding/Painting - Checks internal clearances for inside grinding and painting.

Check Manufacturability Ribbon

Provides the following options, used to check that objects in the model can be manufactured
and to generate production information.
Manufacturability Checking Settings - Shows the rules for the checking process. You can
select any or all of the rules. For more information, see Check Manufacturability Settings Dialog
Box.
Check Manufacturability - Starts the checking process. If inconsistencies are found, the
message Manufacturability errors/warnings have been encountered displays.
Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies - Displays the objects with manufacturing issues.
The list includes the issue severity, the assembly name, a description of the assembly, and the

Piping User's Guide 133

Spooling

name of the rule which detected the manufacturing issue. For more information, see Show
Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box.
Close - Exits the command.
Submit Job - Displays a message box asking if you want to execute the repair rules
subsequently. If you click Yes, the Schedule Planning Check Manufacturability dialog box
displays so that you can schedule the execution of the repair rules at some other time. For more
information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box.

 Learn more about Intergraph Batch Services in the Batch Services User's Guide and the
Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
 The Submit Job button is enabled only when Intergraph Batch Services is installed and
started on your computer.
 The data on objects that cannot be manufactured is stored in the session file, not in the
model. Problem objects that apply to the Workspace are retrieved when you select the
Check Manufacturability command.

Check Manufacturability Settings Dialog Box

Sets options for the Check Manufacturability process.
Rules - A list view of rules that govern the checking process. You can select and clear rules
individually.
Rule - Description of the rule.
ProgID - Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the Rule ProgID of
the rule on the Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies dialog box .
Select All - Specifies all available rules.
Clear - Clears all available rules. You can select rules individually in the list view by clicking the
boxes beside the rule names.
Stop the Processing of Rules when a Rule reports a manufacturability error - Halts rule
processing upon error detection.

Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box

Displays and repairs inconsistencies found by the rules of the Check Manufacturability process.
Inconsistencies - A list view of all inconsistencies.
Warning - A minor manufacturability problem has been found. The problem does not have
to be repaired.
Error - A major manufacturability error has been found. The error must be repaired.
Assembly - Name of the object with an inconsistency.
Description - Description from the rule of the inconsistency
Rule ProgID - Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the ProgID of
the rule on the Manufacturability Checking Settings dialog box.
Action - The type of action that is available in the software to repair the inconsistency. Blank if
no software action is available and the repair is done manually.
 COM Repair Object - Software code that can be run.
 SQL Script - SQL Script that can be run.
Action Tool - ProgID of the COM Repair Object or name of the SQL Script. Blank if Action is
blank.

134 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

Solutions - Describes the details of an inconsistency and the repair that you need to perform for
one selected object from the list.
Repair - Runs the Action Tool to perform a repair, if one is available for the rule.
Fit - Fits one or more selected objects from the list view in the active graphic view.
Clear - Clears all inconsistencies and closes the dialog box. You must click Check
Manufacturability again to display the remaining inconsistencies.

Piping Inconsistencies Messages

Pipe and Spool Length Messages
Pipe is too long - Pipe exceeds standard ordering length for pipe of this size, as defined in the
pipe catalog. For bent pipes the length check includes any extra pipe that had to be added at the
ends or between bends for clamping (see "Extra pipe must be added at end…" and "Insufficient
straight pipe between bends…" messages below.). If the pipe is bent, the elongation of the pipe
during bending will be taken into account when reporting this error.
Pipe is too short - Pipe length is less than the company standard for pipes welded on both
ends.
Spool is too long - The overall length of the spool exceeds company standards. The length is
measured along the main axis of the spool.
Spool is too wide - The "width" is the spool is measured perpendicular to the main axis. This
message indicates that the width exceeds company standards. Checks for surface treatment
tank size are done separately.
Pipe Bending Messages
Bend angle too large – A pipe bends exceeds the maximum bend angle that the bending
machine can make.
Bend angle too small – A pipe bend angle is less than the company standard for bends, that is,
the pipe is almost straight.
Bends have different radii, not allowed – Pipe has two or more bends and they do not all
have the same bend radius specified.
Bend radius too large or points too close together – The pipe geometry is physically
impossible. This is an extreme case of the "insufficient straight pipe between bends…" problem.
This problem may be fixed by moving a bend or using a smaller bend radius.
Extra pipe must be added at end, pipe end too short for bending machine to clamp onto –
The bending machine needs a sufficiently long straight section at the start and end of the pipe to
clamp onto (start), and support (end). This is a warning, bending can be done with a longer
piece of pipe, with the extra pipe cut off afterwards.
Insufficient straight pipe between bends for bending machine to clamp onto – The
bending machine needs a sufficiently long straight section between bends to clamp the pipe.
This problem may be fixed by moving a bend, by using a smaller bend radius, or by splitting the
pipe and putting a joint between the bends.
No pipe bending machine for pipe diameter and bend radius - None of the pipe bending
machine listed in the pipe shop XML data file have bend dies listed for the pipe diameter and
bend radius of this pipe.
Pipe hits machine or floor during bending – The pipe cannot be bent because the free end or
part of the pipe would hit the bending machine or the shop floor during bending. The simulator
will have evaluated bending the pipe starting from either end before reporting this error, and will
have checked all available bending machines with bend dies of the right size. Note: if the pipe
has flanges on either ends, and Flange Welding check option has been selected, the simulator
will also check for attached flange (if any) hitting the machine during bending.

Piping User's Guide 135

Spooling

Pipe and Spool Complexity

Too many bends in pipe – The number of bends in the pipe exceeds the company standard.
This limit is normally set to maintain dimensional accuracy standards because of accumulated
error during bending.
Too many branches – The number of branches off of a main exceeds the company standard
limit.
Too many planes in spool – The spool is difficult to fabricate because it is geometrically
complex. That is, the number of independent planes exceeds the company standard for spools.
Treatment Tank
Spool too large for treatment tank – A spool that requires galvanization or other tank
treatment is too large for the tank.
No treatment tank found for <treatment_name> required by pipe spool – No treatment tank
has been given in PipeBenders.xml for the treatment type called out by the pipe spec. This is an
error in the editing of the PipeBenders.xml file, not a design error in the piping.
Individual pipes in spool require different tank treatments – A pipe spool is composed of
multiple pipes that reference different pipe specs, and those pipe specs call out different,
conflicting tank treatments.
Flange Welding
Flange hits machine or floor during bending, weld after bending – Flanges cannot be
welded on the pipe before bending because they would hit the bending machine or the shop
floor during bending. The simulator will have evaluated bending the pipe starting from either end
before reporting this error, and will have checked all available bending machines with bend dies
of the right size.
Pipe too long for automatic flange welding – This is a warning that a straight pipe with
flanges on one or both ends is too long to be put through the automatic flange welder, and must
be manually welded.
Pipe too short for automatic flange welding – This is a warning that a straight pipe with
flanges on one or both ends is too short to be put through the automatic flange welder, and must
be manually welded.
Inside Grinding and Painting
Pipe too long for inside coating – A pipe requires internal coating, but the pipe is too long for
the available Pipe Internal Sprayer.
No internal sprayer found for inside coating – A pipe requires internal coating (as defined in
the pipe spec entry in the XML file), but there is no Pipe Internal Sprayer available for the
required coating material or for the pipe diameter.
Inaccessible for internal coating – A pipe that requires internal coating after bending has two
or more bends. The sections between the bends are inaccessible for coating.
Bend on branch not allowed – A branch weld is inaccessible for grinding after welding
because of a bend in the branch pipe.
Branch too far from end of main – Grinding cannot be done on a branch connection because
it is too far from the end of the pipe.

Check objects for manufacturability

1. Select objects for checking in the model or in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click Tools > Check Manufacturability.
3. On the ribbon, click Manufacturability Checking Settings .
4. Specify the rules for the checking process.

136 Piping User's Guide

 Spooling

5. On the ribbon, click Check Manufacturability to start the process.

6. On the ribbon, click Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies . A list view displays the
objects that were found to have manufacturing problems.
7. Select one row of the list at a time to view the inconsistency and solution for an object.
8. Repair the object manually, or click Repair if an Action Tool is available.

Piping User's Guide 137

SECTION 12

Sequence Objects
Renames objects in the selected pipeline, pipe run, spool, or WBS item such that the names
are in order. You can select to sequence the objects based on flow direction or topology.

Sequence Objects Ribbon

Sets options for sequencing names in a spool, pipeline, or pipe run.
Grouping/Sequencing Object Type - Select by what you want to sequence. You can select
pipeline, pipe run, spool, or WBS item. This option defines the collection of target objects to be
sequenced, and defines the boundaries of the sequencing.
Cancel - Reset the ribbon options.
Finish - Orders the object names using the options that you have set.
Target Object Type - Select what you want to re-sequence (rename) in the selected grouping.
Name Rule - Select the naming rule to use to rename the target objects.
Sequencing Type - Defines the logical order to use to define the sequence number part of the
name.
Flow Direction - Begin sequencing at the furthermost upstream point on the line and proceed
along the line with the flow direction. Subsequent braches are then processed according to their
flow direction. The following example shows weld sequencing when using flow direction.

Topology - Start from the point on the primary header of the spool, pipeline, or pipe run with the
highest coordinate value and work back along the target objects until all have been processed.

Piping User's Guide 139

Sequence Objects

Subsequent branches are then processed from the furthermost point into the branch connection.
The following example shows weld sequencing when using topology.

Revision Control - Specifies what to do with existing sequence number when you run the
command again. Select Retain existing numbers to keep the sequence number on any objects
that have one, but create a new sequence number for objects that do not have a sequence
number. Select Generate new numbers to discard all sequence numbers for the selected
object and generate new numbers for everything.
Start Sequence Id - Enter the sequence ID from which you want to begin the sequence. This
option is available only when Generate new numbers is selected.

What do you want to do?

 Sequence weld names in a pipeline (on page 141)
 Sequence weld names in a pipe run (on page 141)
 Sequence weld names in a spool (on page 141)
 Sequence weld names in a WBS item (on page 141)

140 Piping User's Guide

 Sequence Objects

Sequence weld names in a pipeline

1. Click Sequence Objects on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Grouping/Sequencing Object Type box, select Pipeline.
3. Select one or more pipelines in the Workspace Explorer or in a graphics view.
4. In the Target Object Type box, select Pipe Weld.
5. In the Sequencing Type box, select how to sequence the welds.
6. Click Finish.

Sequence weld names in a pipe run

1. Click Sequence Objects on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Grouping/Sequencing Object Type box, select Pipe Run.
3. Select one or more pipe runs in the Workspace Explorer or in a graphics view.
4. In the Target Object Type box, select Pipe Weld.
5. In the Sequencing Type box, select how to sequence the welds.
6. Click Finish.

Sequence weld names in a spool

1. Click Sequence Objects on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Grouping/Sequencing Object Type box, select Spool.
3. Select the spool in the Workspace Explorer.
4. In the Target Object Type box, select Pipe Weld.
5. In the Sequencing Type box, select how to sequence the welds.
6. Click Finish.

Sequence Weld Names in a WBS Item

1. Click Sequence Objects on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Grouping/Sequencing Object Type box, select WBS Item.
3. Select the WBS item in the Workspace Explorer.
4. In the Target Object Type box, select Pipe Weld.
5. In the Sequencing Type box, select how to sequence the welds.
6. Click Finish.

Piping User's Guide 141

Sequence Objects

142 Piping User's Guide

SECTION 13

Group Pipe Parts

Automatically creates, names, and assigns piping objects to a Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) item. The WBS items can then be used to drive other operations in the software, such as
Isometric drawings that are created from WBS items. You must claim all the objects to a WBS
project before you can run this command on the objects.
WBS Item Generation Dialog Box (on page 145)

What do you want to do?

 Grouping pipe parts by control points (on page 144)
 Grouping pipe parts by query and control points (on page 143)
 Grouping pipe parts by query (on page 144)

Grouping pipe parts by query and control points

1. On the WBS tab of the Workspace Explorer, verify that you have a parent WBS item or
WBS project to which you want to assign the generated WBS items. If you do not have a
parent WBS project, see Create a Project.
2. Place the control points using the Insert > Control Point command. Be sure to select the
correct control point subtype when placing the control points and that you place the control
points on piping connection objects. For more information, see Add Control Points.
3. On the vertical toolbar, click Group Pipe Parts .
4. Select the Options tab.
5. Set WBS Automated Creation Rule Name to the WBS rule that you want to use. These
rules are defined in the Catalog task under Piping > Piping Specification > Plant Rules >
WBS Creation Rule.
6. Select the naming rule.
7. Set WBS Item's Parent to the WBS project or WBS item that you created or identified in
step 1.
8. Set Discrimination Filter to the filter you want to use.
9. Set Query Label to the label that defines the query parameters and the naming rule to use
in creating the WBS items if not already defined in the rule.
10. Review the remaining options and set as needed.
11. Click OK.
12. Select the Log tab.
13. Review the log. Click Save Log to save the log to a text file if needed.
After processing, you can view the WBS items on the WBS tab in the Workspace
Explorer.

Piping User's Guide 143

Group Pipe Parts

Grouping pipe parts by control points

1. On the WBS tab of the Workspace Explorer, verify that you have a parent WBS item or
WBS project to which to assign the generated WBS items. If you do not have a parent WBS
project, see Create a Project.
2. Place the control points using the Insert > Control Point command. Be sure to select the
correct control point subtype when placing the control points and that you place the control
points on the piping connection objects. For more information, see Add Control Points.
3. On the vertical toolbar, click Group Pipe Parts .
4. Select the Options tab.
5. Set WBS Automated Creation Rule Name to the WBS rule that you want to use. These
rules are defined in the Catalog task under Piping > Piping Specification > Plant Rules >
WBS Creation Rule.
6. Set WBS Item's Parent to the WBS project or the WBS item that you created or identified in
step 1.
7. Set Discrimination Filter to the filter that you want to use.
8. Review the remaining options and set as needed.
9. Click OK.
10. Select the Log tab.
11. Review the log. Click Save Log to save the log to a text file if needed.
After processing, you can view the WBS items on the WBS tab in the Workspace
Explorer.

Grouping pipe parts by query

1. On the WBS tab of the Workspace Explorer, verify that you have a parent WBS item or the
WBS project to which you want to assign the generated WBS items. If you do not have a
parent WBS project, see Create a Project.
2. Use the Tools > Select by Filter command to define a filter to select the piping parts out of
the model for the WBS items. You can use an existing filter if you have one. For more
information, see Create a New Filter.
3. On the vertical toolbar, click Group Pipe Parts .
4. Select the Options tab.
5. Set WBS Automated Creation Rule Name to the WBS rule that you want to use. These
rules are defined in the Catalog task under Piping > Piping Specification > Plant Rules >
WBS Creation Rule.
6. Set WBS Grouping Rule Type to Group by query.
7. Set WBS Item's Parent to the WBS project or WBS item that you created or identified in
step 1.
8. Set Discrimination Filter to the filter that you created or identified in step 2.
9. Set Query Label to the label that defines the query parameters and the naming rule to use
in creating the WBS items if not already defined in the rule.
10. Review the remaining options and set as needed.
11. Click OK.
12. Select the Log tab.
13. Review the log. Click Save Log to save the log to a text file if needed.

144 Piping User's Guide

 Group Pipe Parts

After processing, you can view the WBS items on the WBS tab in the Workspace
Explorer.

WBS Item Generation Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the objects that you want to process.
OK - Processes the piping parts for WBS assignment using the defined options.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Save Log - Saves the information on the Log tab to a text file.
See Also
Group Pipe Parts (on page 143)
Log Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box) (on page 146)
Options Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box) (on page 145)

Options Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box)

Specifies the options to use when using the automatic WBS item generation.
WBS Automated Creation Rule Name - Select the WBS creation rule to use. You can create
new rules and edit existing rules in the Catalog task under Piping > Piping Specification >
Plant Rules > WBS Creation Rule.
Name Rule - Select the name rule to use.
WBS Grouping Type - Displays the grouping type. This field is read-only. You need to edit the
WBS rule in the Catalog task if you want to use a different grouping type for this rule.
Create Exclusive WBS Item - True indicates that the WBS items that are being created are
exclusive. False indicates that the WBS items are not exclusive. This field is read-only. You
need to edit the WBS rule in the Catalog task if you want to change this setting.
Query Label - Select the label that defines the query parameters to use in creating the WBS
items. If the Label Name Rule is selected as the Name Rule option, then the Query Label also
defines the naming convention used when creating WBS items.
Discrimination Filter - Select the filter is use to select the piping parts for the WBS item. The
filter can return any group of objects, but only pipe parts are used.
WBS Item's Parent - Select the parent WBS project or WBS item.
The pipe parts must have been previously claimed to the WBS project.
WBS Grouping Rule Type - Displays how the software selects objects for the WBS items. This
field is read-only. You need to edit the WBS rule in the Catalog task if you want to use a different
grouping rule type for this rule.
 Group by query - Objects are grouped based upon a query that is defined in a label. For
example, use this option to quickly find all pipe parts that belong to run that are heat traced
and then to subgroup them according to other attributes such as sequence number, NPD,
and so forth.
 Group by query and control point - Objects are grouped based on queries and control
points. By using this method, you can group object using the query, and then create
subgroups using the placement of control points.
 Group by control point - Objects are grouped based on control points that you place using
the Insert > Control Point command. Objects between the control points are grouped
together. If this option is used, the control point subtype that is used is displayed in the
Control Point Subtype field.

Piping User's Guide 145

Group Pipe Parts

Control Point Subtype - Displays the control point subtype the command is to look for. The
control points are used as boundaries to define where one WBS item grouping ends and the
next one begins. You place the control points using the Insert > Control Point command. Be
sure that when you are placing the control points that you select the correct control point
subtype and that you place the control point on the piping connection object. This field is
read-only. You need to edit the WBS rule in the Catalog task if you want to use a different
subtype for this rule.
Maximum Number of Objects - Enter the maximum number of objects to put in a WBS item.
When this limit is exceeded, the software logs a warning in the log file.
Pull in Associated Items - Specify what associated items you want included in the WBS item.
 None - Does not include any associated parts in the WBS item.
 Connection and Reportable - Connection items and reportable parts are included in the
WBS item. Examples of these related parts would be gaskets, bolt and nut sets, and welds.
 Supports, Connection and Reportable - Pipe Supports and the connection and reportable
parts are included in the WBS Item.
 Pipe support only - Only pipe supports are included in the WBS item.
Maintain Existing WBS Items? - Select True to have the software change existing WBS items
only when absolutely necessary. Select False to allow the software to delete any existing WBS
items and replace them with new items.
When you add or remove components from a WBS item, the software tries to minimize the
impact to existing WBS items. The change management goals are:
 Inserting a part into a pipeline causes no impact to existing WBS items except for the part
being added to the appropriate WBS item unless the query mandates the creation of a
previously non- existent WBS item.
 Deleting a part from a pipeline causes no impact to the existing WBS Items except for the
part being removed from the appropriate WBS Item.
 Parts which have been previously assigned to a WBS Item will always remain associated to
that same WBS Item (based on the object ID) where possible.
In some cases, some goals may only be partially enforced or may not be enforceable at all. The
level of success in meeting these goals is highly dependent upon how much the piping design
has changed since the command was last run.

Log Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog Box)

Displays a log of the last WBS item generation process. You can save the log to a text file by
clicking Save Log. The log is divided into four parts:
Before - Lists all the WBS items that existed in the model before you ran the last process. This
is the same list of WBS items that displays if you select this tab before processing.
To Do List - Lists WBS items that have been sent to the To Do List. You must fix the WBS
items on the To Do List. Click View > To Do List (or press CTRL+T) to view the To Do List.
Modified - Lists all the WBS items that were modified during the last process.
New - Lists all the WBS items that were created during the last process.

146 Piping User's Guide

 Group Pipe Parts

Piping User's Guide 147

APPENDIX A

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

This appendix contains reference information for all the property dialog boxes in the Piping task.

In This Appendix
Common Property Tabs ................................................................. 149
Connection Properties Dialog Box ................................................. 154
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box .............................................. 155
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box ....................................... 155
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box ............................................... 158
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box .................................................... 158
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box .................................................... 158
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box ................................. 163
Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................... 166
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box ...................................... 168
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box .................................................. 172
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box ......................................... 173
Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box .................................... 178
Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box ............................. 179
Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog Box ........................ 180
Reference 3D Piping Component Properties Dialog Box .............. 180
Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties Dialog Box ............... 182
Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box .................. 184

Common Property Tabs

The software displays some common property tabs on the properties dialog boxes for all piping
objects. Instead of repeatedly listing the common tabs with each piping object property dialog
box, they are documented here for easy reference.
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Connections Tab (on page 151)
Definition Tab (on page 151)
Notes Tab (on page 151)
Occurrence Tab (on page 152)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

Piping User's Guide 149

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Ship\Plant - Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group - Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can
select another permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project
Management task.
Transfer - Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission
group to another satellite or host permission group. This button is only available if the active
model or project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The button is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are nontransferable. For more
information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the Surface Style Rules.
Approval State - Displays the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your
access level, you may not be able to change the status of the object.
You cannot move or rotate an object with a status other than Working. If you have
permission, you must change the status to Working to complete a move or rotate operation.
Status - Specifies where the object stands in the workflow process. Changing this property sets
the Approval State. The items in this list are controlled by the ApprovalReason.xls file. This file
must be bulkloaded. For more information, see the Approval Reason topic in the SmartMarine
3D Reference Data Guide.
Date Created - Displays the date and time that the object was created.
Created by - Displays the user name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified - Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Last Modified by - Displays the user name of the person who modified the object.
Model Name - Displays the Reference 3D model name to which the object belongs. This option
is available only for a Reference 3D object.
File Name - Displays the source file name of the Reference 3D model. This option is available
only for a Reference 3D object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location - Displays the name of the location that the current permission group is
associated with. All of the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group - Displays the name of the permission group that the selected
objects are currently associated with. If all of the objects in the select set do belong to the same
permission group, this box appears blank.
New location - Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a
global workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to
one or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group - Specifies the new permission group to which you want to assign the
selected objects. If you specify a value in the New location box, this list displays all permission
groups that you have write access to in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the
New location box, this list includes all permission groups that you have write access to in all
locations except the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any
permission groups at any locations other than the current one.

150 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

It is strongly recommended that administrators follow naming convention rules that

include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Connections Tab
Displays the connection information for the object, the properties and their values, as defined in
the reference data. For more information about the information defined in the reference data,
see the Piping Reference Data Guide.
Connector - Select the connector for which you want to view properties.
Property - Displays the name of the property as defined in the reference data.
Value - Displays the value of the corresponding property.

Definition Tab
The Definition tab displays the object properties as they are defined in the reference data. The
property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears
on the right side of the grid. If you select more than one object and then view the properties, only
the common properties between the selected objects appear.
The properties that appear depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on
an object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point - Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name - Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date - Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time - Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note - Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author - Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text - Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.
Show dimension - Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be included
for the component in Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension option. The note
must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It is recommended
that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a requirement. The note Name
and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note - Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note - Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not
available in this version.

Piping User's Guide 151

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Highlight Note - Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and
the object to which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note - Deletes the currently displayed note.

Occurrence Tab
Displays instance-specific information about the object.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the object. Object properties are
divided into several different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, Fabrication and
Construction, and Bend Data.

Standard
Displays all the occurrence properties for the part as defined in the reference data. If the table is
blank, the object for which you are viewing properties does not have any occurrence properties
defined for it in the reference data. Not all standard category properties defined here are
available on every part type. For example, the cold spring length property is only available on
pipe parts. For more information about occurrences defined in the reference data, see the Piping
Reference Data Guide.
Name - Specifies the name of the object.
Name Rule - Displays how the object was named. If set to Default Name Rule, the software
named the object using the default naming rule. If set to User Defined, you, or someone else,
named the object manually.
Pipe Run - Displays the name of the parent pipe run to which the object belongs. This field is
read-only.
Type - Displays the object's short code. The list of available short codes is based on the piping
specification and nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the
insertion location.
Option - Displays a list of options that you can use instead of the selected object. If no options
exist, this field just displays Default. The Option list contains any options defined in the piping
specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For example, if you are looking at a
valve part, the Option list contains other valve parts, such as one with a higher pressure rating,
that you can use here. Selecting a value from the Option list updates the object.
Tag - Displays the engineering tag if one is assigned.
Base/Mating Part - Displays whether the selected object is a base part or a mating part. If the
object is a mating part, you can use this option to change the object to a base part. Use caution
however, because after a mating part has been changed to a base part, it cannot be changed
back to a mating part again.
Modeled Length - Displays the length of the pipe as it is modeled.
Cut Length - Displays the cut length of the pipe. The software calculates the cut length using
this formula:
Cut Length = Modeled Length + Field Fit Length End 1 + Field Fit Length End
2 + Flared Lap Length End 1 + Flared Lap Length End 2 - Pipe Bend Elongation
- Cold Spring Length + Bend Grip Length + Bend Pull Length
It is possible that the field fit lengths; the flared lap lengths; and the bending elongation, grip,
and pull lengths are not applicable to the cut length calculation for a given pipe and are therefore
ignored for that pipe.
Field Liner Thickness - Displays the field liner thickness if a liner in defined.
Cold Spring Length - Enter the cold spring length that you want to subtract from the cut length.
A positive value here makes the Cut Length value smaller. The cold spring length refers to

152 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

intentionally cutting a pipe short and then pulling the assembled pipeline to the connection point.
Hence, there is spring in the pipe until the pipe reaches operating temperature, at which point
there is theoretically no stress on the pipe or the connection.
Reporting Requirement - Select the reporting requirements for the object. You can specify that
the object is reported or not reported. An example of an object that you may not want reported is
a spacer for a valve. You have to order the valve, but the spacer comes with the valve and does
not need to be ordered.
Reporting Type - Select the reporting type. The options that are available here depend on what
you select for the Reporting Requirement.
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle of the object.
Stress System Number - Type a stress system number for the part.
Isometric Sheet Number - Type an isometric sheet number for the part. This property is used
in conjunction with the Group Pipe Parts (on page 143).
Sequence ID - Specifies the sequence number for the object.
Branch Reporting Ownership Type Basis - Specifies whether the branch reporting ownership
was set by you or the system. This option is used by the software when an administrator
synchronizes the model with the catalog.
Angle - Displays the angle of the part.

Weight and CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected object. The software includes the
insulation weight in the calculated weight. If you key-in the weight yourself, you must include the
insulation weight in the weight value that you enter. The center-of-gravity locations are displayed
in global system coordinates along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
Dry Weight - Displays the dry weight of the object.
Wet Weight - Displays the wet weight of the object.
Dry CG X - Displays the X-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CG Y - Displays the Y-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Dry CG Z - Displays the Z-axis location of the dry center-of- gravity.
Wet CG X - Displays the X-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CG Y - Displays the Y-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.
Wet CG Z - Displays the Z-axis location of the wet center-of- gravity.

Fabrication and Construction

Fabrication Requirement - Select the fabrication requirement for the selected object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Type - Select the fabrication type for the selected object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Construction Requirement - Select the construction requirement for the selected object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type
select list in the Catalog task.
Construction Type - Select the construction type for the selected object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Construction Type select list in
the Catalog task.

Piping User's Guide 153

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Bend Data
The Bend Data category is only available if the administrator has bulk loaded the Pipe
Bending Manufacturability Rules.xls workbook, and you are viewing properties of a pipe part
with bends defined.
Minimum Length Check - Set this option to True if you want the software to validate pipe
bending manufacturability rules for the selected pipe part.
Bend Type - Defines the pipe bend type.
Preferred Bending Machine - Displays the name of the preferred bending machine as defined
in the reference data.
Minimum Tangent Data Set - Select the set of minimum tangent lengths to use with this pipe
bend configuration.
End Trimming - Specify whether or not ends are trimmed.
Grip Length - Defines the grip length.
Pull Length - Defines the pull length.
Number of Bends in Piece - Displays the number of bends in the pipe part.
Number of Tangents in Piece - Displays the number of tangents in the pipe part.
See Also
Common Property Tabs (on page 149)

Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the object for which you are viewing properties. For example, if
you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts, associated
control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS assignments,
including project relationships, appear on this tab.
Name - Displays the name of the related object.
Type - Displays the type of related object.
Go To - Displays the properties of the selected object.

Connection Properties Dialog Box

Displays connection properties for review and editing. Use the Relationships tab to view the
properties of the bolts, gaskets, washers, nuts, welds, and other information about the
connections.
The ownership assignment of connection items (such as welds, gaskets, bolts, and so forth) is
done through a hard-coded rule. Components have higher priority for ownership than
stock-parts (such as pipes). Between components, base-parts have higher priority (for example,
bolts and gaskets get assigned to a valve instead of the mating flanges). If both the parts are
equal in priority, the connection is between two pipes or the flange has been inserted explicitly
therefore both flange and valve are base-parts, the owner is determined by the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the two connected parts. The part that has the lower XYZ coordinates will be the
owner.
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 155)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

154 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected connection.
Category - Select the properties that you want to see. You can view system properties or
user-defined properties.
Pipeline - Displays the pipeline to which the connection belongs. You cannot change this value.
Connected Type - Displays the type of connection. You cannot change this value.
See Also
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 154)

Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box

Displays bolt set properties for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 152)
Definition Tab (on page 151)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays end feature properties for review and editing.
General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 155)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected end feature.
Pipe end feature properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and
Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. Select the category to define values in the
Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the pipeline system to which the end feature belongs. You cannot change
the pipeline of the end feature.
Pipe Run - Displays the pipe run to which the end feature belongs. You cannot change the pipe
run of the end feature.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the end feature. All pipe specifications
that are allowed for the pipeline display for selection. If appears in the box, the pipe
specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the end feature belongs. If the icon does not
appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run
Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the end feature. If appears in
the box, the NPD for the end feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the end feature
belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe
run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part
appears and cannot be changed.

Piping User's Guide 155

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Type - Displays the types of end features allowed by the selected Specification and Nominal
Diameter. End features are listed by short codes. You can change the end feature type if
needed. If you have manually selected the part from the catalog, this box displays Part selected
manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available end features. The software generates this list based on the
pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code you selected in the Type box. If you have
manually selected the part from the catalog, this box displays Part selected manually and
cannot be changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the end feature. The part name is selected by the
software using the pipe specification guidelines. Select Select Manually to override the pipe
specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually, the
Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
The Select Manually option may not be available. It is enabled and disabled in the
reference data.
Correlation Status - Displays whether or not the pipe end feature has been correlated to a pipe
end feature in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipe end feature is correlated to a P&ID pipe end feature.
Select Correlate object if the pipe end feature has a correlating pipe end feature in a P&ID.
Select No correlation is required if the pipe end feature does not have a correlating pipe run in
a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipe end feature is approved with discrepancies
in the three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the pipe end feature topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipe end feature data and topology mismatches can be ignored.
Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
You define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. You define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.

156 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.

Piping User's Guide 157

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 155)

Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box

Displays gasket properties for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 152)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Definition Tab (on page 151)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box

Displays properties for pipe parts for review and editing.
Occurrence Tab (on page 152)
Definition Tab (on page 151)
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 154)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)
Notes Tab (on page 151)

Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box

Displays pipe run properties for review and editing.
Edit Pipe Run Properties (on page 89)
General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) (on page 159)

158 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected pipe run.
Because pipe run properties are customizable in the piping reference data, only the
properties that are required by the software are documented.
Pipe run properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Testing,
Temperature and Pressure, Surface Treatment and Coating, Insulation and Tracing, and
Responsibility. Select the category that you want to define values for by using the Category
option.

Standard
Pipeline - Select the pipeline system to which you want the pipe run to belong. The last pipeline
system that you selected is the default. Select More to display all defined pipeline systems. You
can create a new pipeline in the Systems and Specifications task.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run. The pipe run name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you specify a name in this box, the software automatically sets the Name Rule box
to User Defined.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule to name the pipe run. You can select one of the listed
rules or specify the pipe run name yourself in the Name box.
Specification - Select the pipe specification for the pipe run. Only those pipe specifications that
are allowed in the pipeline that you selected appear in the list. You can assign pipe
specifications to pipeline systems in the System and Specifications task. You can define pipe
specifications in the reference data. See the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information
on defining pipe specifications.
Nominal Diameter - Select the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) to use for this pipe run. The pipe
specification controls the available NPDs in this list. If you select an equipment nozzle as the
starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the NPD of the nozzle as the
NPD of the pipe run. You can select the NPD units to display on a session file basis using the
Tools > Options command on the Units of Measure tab.
Flow Direction - Select the flow direction for the pipe run. If you select an equipment nozzle as
the starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the flow direction of the
nozzle as the flow direction of the pipe run.
Minimum Slope - Specifies the slope for the pipe run. You can specify the slope as a ratio, a
percentage, or in degrees.
 As a ratio, if a run drops 1/4" for every foot of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
1/4"/1'-0".
 As a percentage, if a run drops 1" for every 10" of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
10%.
 In degrees, a five-degree slope can be specified as 5deg.
Slope Direction - Displays the direction type of the pipe run slope. If it is set to Single, the pipe
run slopes either up or down. You can change this to Multiple if needed. If it is set to Multiple,
the pipe run can slope both up and down. You cannot change this setting back to Single once
Multiple is selected.
Schedule Override - Specifies the thickness override for parts in the pipe run. If the piping
specification rules do not allow you to override components, then the software disables this
option.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipe run has been correlated to a pipe run in a P&ID.

Piping User's Guide 159

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipe run is required to be correlated to a P&ID pipe run.
Select Correlate object if the pipe run has a correlating pipe run in a P&ID. Select No
correlation is required if the pipe run does not have a correlating pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipe run is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the pipe run topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipe run data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.

Temperature and Pressure

If service limits have been defined, then you must define one set of pressure/temperature
values (Design Maximum Temperature and Design Maximum Pressure, for example) before
you can place the object. The software does not prevent you from defining testing temperatures
and pressures that exceed the defined service limits.
Design Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum operating pressure. Include the
pressure unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this
value.
Testing Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Design Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.

160 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Operating Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum operating pressure. Include the pressure
unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Piping User's Guide 161

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Select the insulation specification to use. Select More to choose an
insulation specification allowed for the system. You assign which insulation specifications are
available in which systems in the System and Specifications task.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the purpose of the insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference
data.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Material box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the insulation material to use.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated
or a specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the
insulation thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the pipe run is heat-traced. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.

162 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing the weld on the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box (on page 158)

Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays straight feature properties for review and editing.
Edit Straight Pipe Properties (on page 89)
General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the straight feature.
Straight features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe
run property, the corresponding straight properties also change automatically.
Pipe run properties are divided into different categories: Standard, Insulation and Tracing, and
Surface Treatment and Coating. You select which category that you want to define values for
by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the system to which the straight feature belongs. You cannot change the
system of the straight feature.
Pipe Run - Specifies the pipe run to which the straight feature belongs. Other pipe runs in the
same pipeline as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the straight feature. All pipe
specifications that are allowed for the System parent of the pipe run appear for selection. If
appears in the box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the straight
feature belongs. If the icon does not appear and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the straight feature. If appears
in the box, the NPD for the straight feature is inherited from the pipe run to which the straight
feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the
pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected
part appears and cannot be changed.
Type - Displays the types of straight features allowed by the selected Specification and
Nominal Diameter. Straight features are listed by short codes. You can change the straight
feature type if needed. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected
manually and cannot be changed.

Piping User's Guide 163

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Option - Displays a list of available straight features. The software generates this list based on
the pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code that you selected in the Type box. If you
have manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be
changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the straight feature. The software selects the part
number using the pipe specification guidelines. Choose the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Length - Displays the length of the straight feature. You cannot change the length of the straight
feature.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
You define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. You define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.

164 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.

Piping User's Guide 165

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 163)

Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays surface mounted component properties for review and editing.
General Tab (Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties Dialog

Box)
Displays and defines the general properties of the selected surface mounted component.
Pipe surface mounted component properties are divided into different categories: Standard,
Insulation and Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. You select which category that
you want to define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the pipeline system to which the surface mounted component belongs. You
cannot change the pipeline of the surface mounted component.
Pipe Run - Displays the pipe run to which the surface mounted component belongs. You cannot
change the pipe run of the surface mounted component.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the surface mounted component. All
pipe specifications that are allowed for the pipeline display for selection. If appears in the
box, the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the surface mounted
component belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from
the pipe run, select Use Run Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the surface mounted component. If
appears in the box, the NPD for the surface mounted component is inherited from the pipe
run to which the surface mount feature belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to
use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If you have manually
selected the part, the NPD of the selected part appears and cannot be changed.
Type - Displays the types of surface mounted components allowed by the selected
Specification and Nominal Diameter. Surface mounted components are listed by short codes.
You can change the component type if needed. If you have manually selected the part from the
catalog, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available surface mounted components. The software generates this
list based on the pipe specification, the NPD, and the short code you selected in the Type box. If
you have manually selected the part from the catalog, this box displays Part selected manually
and cannot be changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the surface mounted component. The part name
is selected by the software using the pipe specification guidelines. Select Select Manually to
override the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part
manually, the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.

166 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

The Select Manually option may not be available. It is enabled and disabled in the
reference data.
Rotation Angle - Specifies the rotation angle of the surface mounted component around the
pipe.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the surface mounted component has been correlated to
a pipe end feature in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the surface mounted component is correlated to a P&ID surface
mounted component. Select Correlate object if the surface mounted component has a
correlating surface mounted component in a P&ID. Select No correlation is required if the
surface mounted component does not have a correlating pipe run in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the surface mounted component is approved with
discrepancies in the three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology
mismatch approved if the surface mounted component topology mismatch can be ignored.
Select Data and Topology mismatches approved if the surface mounted component data and
topology mismatches can be ignored. Select None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
You define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. You define insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
 Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
 Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.

Piping User's Guide 167

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box

Displays elbows, pipe bends, and other turn properties for review and editing.
Delete a Turn (on page 93)
Edit Turn Feature Properties (on page 89)

168 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Move a Turn (on page 86)

General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 169)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected elbow or pipe bend.
Turn features inherit some properties from the parent pipe run. If you change the pipe run
property, the corresponding turn properties also automatically change.
Pipe turn feature properties are divided into several different categories: Standard, Insulation
and Tracing, and Surface Treatment and Coating. Select the category that you want to define
values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Pipeline - Displays the name of the parent pipeline. This property is read-only.
Pipe Run - Specify the pipe run to which the turn belongs. Other pipe runs in the same pipeline
as the original pipe run appear for selection.
Specification - Specify the active pipe specification for the turn. All the pipe specifications that
are allowed for the System parent of the pipe run display for selection. If appears in the box,
the pipe specification is inherited from the pipe run to which the turn belongs. If the icon does
not appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run
Specification.
Nominal Diameter - Specify the nominal diameter (NPD) of the turn. If appears in the box,
the NPD for the turn is inherited from the pipe run to which the turn belongs. If the icon does not
appear, and you want to use the pipe specification from the pipe run, select Use Run NPD. If
you have manually selected the part, the NPD of the selected part appears and cannot be
changed.
Type - Displays the types of turns allowed by the selected Specification and Nominal
Diameter. Turns are listed by short codes. You can change the turn type if needed. If you have
manually selected the part, this box displays Part selected manually and cannot be changed.
Option - Displays a list of available turns. The software generates this list based on the pipe
specification, the NPD, and the short code you selected in the Type box. For example, if you
selected a 90E Default in the Type box and more than one elbow works in this pipe run, the
elbows appear here for selection. If you have manually selected the part, this box displays Part
selected manually and cannot be changed.
Base Part Name - Displays the part name for the turn. The part number is selected by the
software using the pipe specification guidelines. Select the Select Manually option to override
the pipe specification, and select the part number from the catalog. If you select a part manually,
the Nominal Diameter, Type and Option properties are disabled.
Angle - Displays the angle of the turn feature. The angle is measured from the imaginary
extension of the run.
Bend Radius Multiplier - Specify the bend radius multiplier for the selected bend. This
overrides the default bend radius multiplier defined in the piping specification. This field is not
available unless the Pipe Bend Radius By User Option is set to Pipe Bend Radius By User Is
Enabled in the Catalog task. You can find the option in Catalog under the Piping > Piping
Specifications > Plant Options node in the tree view.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the object has been correlated to an object in a P&ID.

Piping User's Guide 169

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Correlation Basis - Specifies if the object is correlated to a P&ID object. Select Correlate
object if the object has a correlating object in a P&ID. Select No correlation is required if the
object does not have a correlating object in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the object is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if the object topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the object data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Displays the insulation specification for the object. If appears in
the box, the insulation specification for the object is inherited from the pipe run to which the
object belongs.
Define which insulation specifications are available for which systems in the System and
Specifications task. Define the insulation specifications in the reference data. If you select Not
Insulated, the software disables the remaining insulation properties.
Select User Defined to specify the remaining insulation properties using custom settings.
Select More to select an insulation specification from the reference data. The software
automatically enters information from the insulation specification.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the
purpose of the insulation in this box. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data
insulation specification, the software reads the purpose from the insulation specification from the
reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in the
Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation Material
box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can select the insulation
material that you want to use. If Insulation Specification is a selected reference data insulation
specification, the software reads the material from the insulation specification from the reference
data and displays it here.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated in
the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the Insulation
Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the insulation
thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data. If the value in the
Insulation Specification field is a selected reference data insulation specification, the software
reads the thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it
here.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the object is heat-traced. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.

170 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Surface Treatment and Coating

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.
See Also
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 168)

Piping User's Guide 171

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box

Displays weld properties for review and editing.
Edit Weld Properties (on page 99)
General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box) (on page 172)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected weld. Properties are defined in the
reference data.
Weld properties are divided into different categories: Standard and Testing. You select which
category that you want to define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Name - Displays the name of the weld. The weld name is based on the Name Rule selection. If
you want to type a new name for the weld, then type a name for the weld in the Name box. If
you do specify the name of the weld yourself, do not include spaces in the weld name.
Name Rule - Specify the naming rule that you want to use to name this weld.
Class - Displays the weld class. Valid classes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on
the Weld Type sheet.
Type - Specifies the weld type. Valid types are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Weld Type sheet. If appears in the box, the weld type is inherited from the pipe run to which
the weld belongs. If the icon does not appear, and you want to use the weld type from the pipe
run, select By Rule.
Welding Procedure Specification - Specifies the welding procedure specification.
Materials Category - Displays the materials category for the weld.
Materials Grade - Displays the materials grade for the weld.
Gap - Displays the gap between the welded ends of the welded joint.
Pass Length - Displays the weld length.
Thickness - Displays the weld thickness.
Height - Displays the weld height.
Owning Part - Select the component that owns the weld. The weld displays on the parent
component's isometric sheet.
Sequence Id - Displays the sequence ID for the weld. The sequence ID is generated when you
run the Sequence Objects command.

172 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.
Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.
See Also
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box (on page 172)

Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box

Displays pipeline system properties for review and editing.
General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 173)
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 174)
Default Property Values Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 174)
See Also
Edit Pipeline Properties (on page 88)

General Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and defines the general properties of the selected pipeline.
Name - Specifies the name of the pipeline. This name is usually generated by the active name
rule. You can type a different name for the pipeline if you want. The name must be unique
throughout the life cycle of the plant.
Name rule - Specifies the name rule used to generate the name. Set this option to User
Defined if you want to specify the name yourself.
Type - Displays the type of object. On the Pipeline Properties dialog box, the type is Pipeline
System.
Parent System - Displays the system to which the pipeline belongs. You can change the parent
system of the pipeline if needed.
Description - Type a general description of the pipeline.
Sequence Number - Type an identification number for the pipeline. Generally, this is defined in
the P&ID data.
Fluid Requirement - Select the fluid requirement for the pipeline. You must select a fluid
requirement.
Fluid Type - Select the fluid type for the pipeline. You must select a fluid type.
Correlation Status - Displays whether the pipeline has been correlated to a pipeline in a P&ID.
Correlation Basis - Specifies if the pipeline should be correlated to a P&ID pipeline. Select
Correlate object if the pipeline has a correlating pipeline in a P&ID. Select No correlation is
required if the pipeline does not have a correlating pipeline in a P&ID.
Correlation Approval Status - Specifies if the pipeline is approved with discrepancies in the
three-dimensional data compared with design basis data. Select Topology mismatch
approved if pipeline topology mismatch can be ignored. Select Data and Topology
mismatches approved if the pipeline data and topology mismatches can be ignored. Select
None if you do not want to approve a mismatch.

Piping User's Guide 173

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

See Also
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box (on page 173)

Specifications Tab (Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box)

Displays all the allowed specifications for the selected pipeline. You can define piping
specifications in the reference data; refer to the Piping Reference Data Guide for more
information. You can change which specifications are available for the pipeline by using the
Allowed Specifications command in the System and Specifications task.
See Also
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box (on page 173)

Default Property Values Tab (Pipeline System Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies the default piping specification, nominal diameter, and minimum slope for new pipe
runs that are created in this pipeline system.

Standard
Specification - Select the pipe specification to be the default for pipe runs in this pipeline
system. Only those pipe specifications that are allowed in the pipeline that you selected appear.
You assign pipe specifications to pipeline systems in the System and Specifications task. You
define pipe specifications in the reference data. See the Piping Reference Data Guide for more
information on defining pipe specifications.
Nominal Diameter - Defines the default nominal pipe diameter (NPD) for pipe runs in this
pipeline system. The pipe specification controls the available NPDs in this list. If you select an
equipment nozzle as the starting point of your pipe run, the software automatically uses the NPD
of the nozzle as the NPD of the pipe run. You can select the NPD units to display on a session
file basis using the Tools > Options command on the Units of Measure tab. Be sure to include
the units of measure when defining this value.
Minimum Slope - Defines the default slope for the pipe run. You can specify the slope as a
ratio, a percentage, or in degrees.
 As a ratio, if a run drops 1/4" for every foot of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
1/4"/1'-0".
 As a percentage, if a run drops 1" for every 10" of horizontal distance, specify the slope as
10%.
 In degrees, a five-degree slope can be specified as 5deg.

Insulation and Tracing

Insulation Specification - Select the insulation specification to use. Select More to choose an
insulation specification allowed for the system. You assign which insulation specifications are
available in which systems in the System and Specifications task.
Insulation Purpose - Displays the purpose of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Purpose box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the purpose of the insulation in this box. Available purposes are read from the reference
data.
Insulation Material - Displays the material of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated or a
specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the

174 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation Material box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, you can
select the insulation material to use.
Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. If you selected Not Insulated
or a specification in the Insulation Specification box, you cannot change the information in the
Insulation Thickness box. However, if Insulation Specification is manually defined, select the
insulation thickness from those values allowed for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Type the temperature. Include the temperature unit of measure, K for
Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when specifying this value.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select whether or not the pipe run is heat-traced. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium
select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the type of heat-tracing. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to apply to the run. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Heat Tracing Medium select list
in the Catalog task.
Heat Tracing Medium Temperature - Specify the temperature of the heat-tracing medium.
Include the temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for
example, when specifying this value.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility - Select the party responsible for cleaning the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Design Responsibility - Select the party responsible for designing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Design Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Fabrication Responsibility - Select the party responsible for fabricating the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Fabrication
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.
Installation Responsibility - Select the party responsible for installing the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Installation Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Painting Responsibility - Select the party responsible for painting the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Painting Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Requisition Responsibility - Select the party responsible for ordering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Requisition Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Supply Responsibility - Select the party responsible for delivering the object. If you want to
add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Supply Responsibility
select list in the Catalog task.
Testing Responsibility - Select the party responsible for testing the weld on the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing
Responsibility select list in the Catalog task.

Testing
Testing Requirements - Specifies whether non-destructive testing of welds is required.

Piping User's Guide 175

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Testing Type - Select the type of non-destructive weld testing for the welds. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Testing Type select list in the
Catalog task.
Testing Percentage - Type the percentage of the welds on this pipe run that are to be tested.
This option is available only if you are viewing pipe run properties.

Surface Treatments and Coatings

Interior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the interior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior
Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Interior Surface Treatment Type - Select the interior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Interior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Requirement - Select the exterior treatment requirement for the
object. If you want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the
Exterior Surface Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Surface Treatment Type - Select the exterior treatment type for the object. If you want
to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Exterior Surface
Treatment select list in the Catalog task.
Cleaning Requirement - Select the cleaning requirement for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Cleaning Requirement select list in
the Catalog task.
Steamout Requirement - Select the steam out requirement for the object. If you want to add,
edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Steamout Requirement select
list in the Catalog task.
Steamout Pressure - Specify the steamout pressure for the object. Include the pressure unit of
measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Steamout Temperature - Specify the steamout temperature for the object. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Auxiliary Treatment Requirement - Specify any auxiliary treatment requirement.
Auxiliary Treatment Type - Specify any auxiliary treatment type.
Interior Coating Requirement - Select the interior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Interior Coating Type - Select the interior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit, or
remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Interior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Exterior Coating Requirement - Select the exterior coating requirement for the object. If you
want to add, edit, or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select
list in the Catalog task.
Exterior Coating Type - Select the exterior coating type for the object. If you want to add, edit,
or remove values that are available for selection, edit the Coating Type select list in the Catalog
task.
Exterior Coating Area - Enter the total area that the coating covers.
Coating Color - Select the color of the object coating. If you want to add, edit, or remove values
that are available for selection, edit the Coating Color select list in the Catalog task.

176 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Temperature and Pressure

If service limits have been defined, then you must define one set of pressure/temperature
values (Design Maximum Temperature and Design Maximum Pressure, for example) before
you can place the object. The software does not prevent you from defining testing temperatures
and pressures that exceed the defined service limits.
Design Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum design temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Design Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum operating temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Operating Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum operating pressure. Include the
pressure unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this
value.
Testing Maximum Temperature - Specify the maximum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Temperature - Specify the minimum testing temperature. Include the
temperature unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius for example, when
specifying this value.
Testing Maximum Pressure - Specify the maximum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Design Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum design pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Operating Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum operating pressure. Include the pressure
unit of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
Testing Minimum Pressure - Specify the minimum testing pressure. Include the pressure unit
of measure, psi for pounds per square inch for example, when specifying this value.
See Also
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box (on page 173)

Piping User's Guide 177

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box

Displays Reference 3D pipe properties. Reference 3D object properties are read only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box) (on page 178)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box)

Name - Displays the name of the pipe in the Reference 3D model.
Layer Name - Displays the layer name on which the pipe is contained.
Short Material Description - Displays the short material description for the pipe. The software
uses this description in the bill-of-materials part of isometric drawings, for reporting, and for
visual feedback to the piping designer for design, construction, and fabrication.
Contractor Commodity Code - Displays the contractor commodity code. This code is used
during the design phase.
Component Name - Displays the description of the piping component.
Primary Size - Displays the fitting size (NPD) of the first piping point.
Secondary Size - Displays the fitting size (NPD) of the second piping point.
Option - Displays a list of options that you can use instead of the selected object. If no options
exist, this field just displays Default. The Option list contains any options defined in the piping
specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For example, if you are looking at a
valve part, the Option list contains other valve parts, such as one with a higher pressure rating,
that you can use here.
Type - Displays the object's short code. The short code is based on the piping specification and
nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the insertion location.
Dry Weight - Displays the dry weight of the object.
Design Maximum Pressure - Displays the maximum allowable pressure for the pipe.
Design Maximum Temperature - Displays the maximum allowable temperature.
Flow direction - Displays the direction of the fluid flow for the pipe.
Pipe Run Name - Displays the name of the pipe run associated to the pipe.
Spool Name - Displays the name of the piping spool it belongs to.
Nominal Diameter - Displays the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) of the pipe.
Operating Pressure - Displays the operating pressure of the pipe.
Operating Temperature - Displays the operating temperature of the pipe.
Geometry Industry Practice - Displays the source industry standard used in the preparation of
the pipe catalog data.
Stock Part Length - Displays the length of the pipe.
Stock Part Cut Length - Displays the cut length of the pipe. Flared lap lengths; and bending
elongation, grip, and pull lengths are not applicable to the cut length calculation for a given pipe
and are therefore ignored for that pipe.
Fabrication Requirement - Displays whether or not the pipe requires fabrication.
Fabrication Type - Displays the fabrication code for the pipe.
Construction Status - Displays the construction status of the pipe placed in the model. The
default construction status is New.

178 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Construction Status 2 -
MTO Reporting Requirements - Displays the reporting requirements for the object, whether
the object is reported or not reported.
MTO Reporting Type - Displays the reporting type. The reporting type displayed depends on
the Reporting Requirement you choose.
Geometry Industry Standard - Displays the code that represents the source used in the
preparation of the catalog data applicable to the object.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of object.

Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box

Displays Reference 3D pipe run properties. Reference 3D object properties are read-only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box) (on page 179)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the standard properties of the Reference 3D pipe run. Reference 3D object properties
are read-only.
Name - Displays the name of the pipe run.
Flow Direction - Displays the direction of the fluid flow for the pipe run.
Piping Materials Class - Displays the piping material class short code for the pipe run.
Nominal Diameter - Displays the nominal pipe diameter (NPD) of the pipe run.
Normal Design Temperature Max - Displays the maximum design temperature in unit of
measure, K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit or C for Celsius.
Normal Design Pressure Max - Displays the maximum design pressure in unit of measure, psi
for pounds per square inch.
Insulation Purpose 3 - Displays the thickness of the insulation. The software reads the
thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Composite Material
Total Insulation Thickness - Displays the thickness of the insulation. The software reads the
insulation thickness for the material in the reference data.
Insulation Temperature - Displays the insulation temperature in unit of measure, K for Kelvin, F
for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius.
SP3D System Path
Layer Name - Displays the layer name on which the pipe run is contained.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of piping object.

Piping User's Guide 179

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog Box

Displays Reference 3D pipe nozzle properties. Reference 3D object properties are read only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 180)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties Dialog

Box)
Name - Displays the name of the nozzle in the Reference 3D model.
Layer Name - Displays the name of the layer in which the nozzle is contained.
ID - Displays the description of the nozzle.
Port Index - Displays the port index number from the Reference 3D model.
Termination - Displays the termination class for the nozzle.
NPD - Displays nominal pipe diameter value and units of the nozzle.
End Preparation - Displays the end preparation code for the nozzle port.
Pressure Rating - Displays the pressure rating of the nozzle port.
Pressure Rating Standard - Displays the pressure rating standard for the nozzle port.
Schedule Thickness - Displays the short description or code that represents the thickness for
the piping nozzle.
End Standard - Displays the end standard for the nozzle port.
Flow Direction - Displays the flow direction for the port.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of object.

Reference 3D Piping Component Properties Dialog

Box
Displays Reference 3D piping component properties. Reference 3D object properties are read
only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Component Properties Dialog Box) (on page 181)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

180 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Component Properties

Dialog Box)
Displays the standard properties of the Reference 3D piping component. All these properties are
read-only.
Name - Displays the name of the piping component.
Bend Angle - Displays the pipe bend angle for the piping component. For example 90 deg.
Bend Radius - Displays the pipe bend radius for the piping component.
Face To Face Dimension - Displays the distance between port1 face to port2 face.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Displays whether or not the piping component is heat-traced.
Tracing Max Temperature - Displays the maximum heat-tracing temperature of the piping
component.
Inspection ISO ID - Displays the inspection ISO ID of the piping component in the reference
model.
Insulation Specification - Displays whether or not the piping component is insulated.
Insulation Purpose 1 - Displays the purpose of the insulation.
Insulation Purpose 2 - Displays the material of the insulation.
Insulation Purpose 3 - Displays the thickness of the insulation.
Operating Temperature - Displays the maximum operating temperature of the piping
component.
Schedule or Thickness - Displays the schedule thickness short description or code for the
piping component.
Schedule Thickness 2
Outer Diameter - Displays the component's outer diameter for the piping port in units of
measure, such as millimeters (mm) or inches (in).
Nominal Diameter - Displays the nominal diameter (NPD) of the piping component feature. The
piping component feature is inherited from the pipe run which the component feature belongs.
Piping Model Code - Displays the piping model code for SmartMarine 3D.
Piping Component Type 1 - Displays the commodity type short code for the piping component.
Piping Component Type 2
Piping Commodity Option 1 - Displays short code for the primary commodity object from the
Piping job specification.
Piping Commodity Option 2
Commodity Specialty Type - Displays the short code for the piping commodity specialty type.
Valve Operator Type - Displays the code that represents the type of valve operator, actuator, or
appurtenance used in the model. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on
the ValveOperatorType sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Geometric Industry Practice - Displays the source industry standard used in the preparation of
the pipe catalog data.
Geometric Industry Standard - Displays the name of the source, either an industry standard or
a manufacturer, used in the preparation of the catalog data applicable to the piping component.
Valve Operator Class - Displays the valve operator class used by the piping component.
Operating Pressure - Displays the maximum operating pressure of the piping component.
Option - Displays a list of options that you can use instead of the selected object. If no options
exist, this field just displays Default. The Option list contains any options defined in the piping

Piping User's Guide 181

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For example, if you are looking at a
valve part, the Option list contains other valve parts, such as one with a higher pressure rating,
that you can use here.
Spool Name - Displays the name of the piping spool it belongs to.
Type - Displays the object's short code. The short code is based on the piping specification and
nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the insertion location.
Commodity Code - Displays the commodity code for the penetrating spool.
Short - Displays the short code for the piping component.
Piping Component Type 3
Dry Installed Weight - Displays the dry weight of the piping component.
Fabrication Requirement - Displays whether or not the pipe requires fabrication.
Fabrication Type - Displays the fabrication code for the piping component.
Construction Status - Displays the construction status of the piping component placed in the
model. The default construction status is New.
Construction Status 2
MTO Reporting Requirements - Displays the reporting requirements for the object, whether
the object is reported or not reported.
MTO Reporting Type - Displays the reporting type. The reporting type displayed depends on
the Reporting Requirement you choose.
Catalog Part Number - Displays the catalog part number associated with the piping component
Layer Name - Displays the layer name on which the piping component is contained.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of object.

Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties Dialog

Box
Displays Reference 3D piping instrument properties. Reference 3D object properties are read
only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties Dialog Box) (on page 182)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)

General Tab (Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties

Dialog Box)
Name - Displays the name of the instrument.
Bend Angle - Displays the pipe bend angle for the instrument. For example 90 deg.
Bend Radius - Displays the pipe bend radius for the instrument.
Face To Face Dimension - Displays the distance between port1 face to port2 face.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Displays whether or not the piping component is heat-traced.
Tracing Max Temperature - Displays the maximum heat-tracing temperature of the piping
component.
Inspection ISO ID - Displays the inspection ISO ID of the piping component in the reference
model.
Insulation Specification - Displays whether or not the piping component is insulated.

182 Piping User's Guide

 Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Insulation Purpose 1 - Displays the purpose of insulation. The software reads the purpose from
the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Purpose 2 - Displays the material of the insulation. The software reads the material
from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it here.
Insulation Purpose 3 - Displays the thickness of the insulation. The software reads the
thickness from the insulation specification from the reference data and displays it here.
Operating Temperature - Displays the maximum operating temperature of the piping
component.
Schedule or Thickness - Displays the schedule thickness short description or code for the
piping component.
Schedule Thickness 2
Outer Diameter - Displays the component's outer diameter for the piping port in units of
measure, such as mm (millimeters) or in (inches).
Nominal Diameter - Displays the nominal diameter (NPD) of the piping component feature. The
piping component feature is inherited from the pipe run which the component feature belongs.
Piping Model Code - Displays the piping model code for SmartMarine 3D.
Piping Component Type 1 - Displays the commodity type short code for the piping component.
Piping Component Type 2
Piping Commodity Option 1 - Displays short code for the primary commodity object from the
piping job specification.
Piping Commodity Option 2 - Displays short code for the secondary commodity object from
the piping job specification.
Commodity Specialty Type
Valve Operator Type - Displays the code that represents the type of valve operator, actuator, or
appurtenance used in the model.
Geometric Industry Practice - Displays the source industry standard used in the preparation of
the pipe catalog data.
Geometric Industry Standard - Displays the name of the source, either an industry standard or
a manufacturer, used in the preparation of the catalog data applicable to the piping component.
Valve Operator Class - Displays the valve operator class used by the piping instrument.
Operating Pressure - Displays the maximum operating pressure of the piping instrument.
Option - Displays a list of options that you can use instead of the selected object. If no options
exist, this field just displays Default. The Option list contains any options defined in the piping
specification for the short code selected in the Type list. For example, if you are looking at a
valve part, the Option list contains other valve parts, such as one with a higher pressure rating,
that you can use here.
Spool Name - Displays the name of the penetrating spool.
Type - Displays the object's short code. The short code is based on the piping specification and
nominal diameter of the object selected along with the geometry at the insertion location.
Commodity Code - Displays the commodity code for the penetrating spool.
Short - Displays the short code for the piping instrument.
Piping Component Type 3
Dry Installed Weight - Displays the dry weight of the piping component.
Fabrication Requirement - Displays whether or not the pipe requires fabrication.
Fabrication Type - Displays the fabrication code for the piping component.

Piping User's Guide 183

Appendix: Property Dialog Boxes

Construction Status - Displays the construction status of the piping component placed in the
model. The default construction status is New.
Construction Status 2
MTO Reporting Requirements - Displays the reporting requirements for the object, whether
the object is reported or not reported.
MTO Reporting Type - Displays the reporting type. The reporting type displayed depends on
the Reporting Requirement you choose.
Catalog Part Number - Displays the catalog part number associated with the reference 3D
instrument.
Layer Name - Displays the layer name on which the piping component is contained.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of object.

Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box

Displays Reference 3D pipeline system properties. Reference 3D object properties are read
only.
General Tab (Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 184)
Configuration Tab (on page 150)
Relationship Tab (on page 154)

General Tab (Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties

Dialog Box)
Displays the standard properties of the Reference 3D pipeline system. All these properties are
read-only.
Name - Displays the name of the pipeline system.
Layer Name - Displays the layer name in which the pipeline system is contained.
Fluid System - Displays the fluid system to which the pipeline system belongs.
Fluid Code - Displays the short code for fluid type intended to flow in the selected pipeline
system. The Fluid Code select list (codelist) defines the fluid codes available for use in the
model
Sequence Number - Displays the identification number that is assigned to the selected pipeline
system when it is created.
Source object type - Displays the name of the type of object.

184 Piping User's Guide

Glossary

A
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.

Active Template Library (ATL)

Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM) model. Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.

actuator
A device used to operate a valve using electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic pressure.

angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.

approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern the ability of users to alter specific data about a product.

arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.

arrangement (piping)
Components of a piping system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation.

Piping User's Guide 185

Glossary

attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.

axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms
of an x, y, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the
center or axis for rotations.

B
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.

bill of material (BOM)

Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).

branch point
A place where at least three segments of pipe intersect or where a pipe run extends out of a
header.

bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.

C
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.

186 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each Plant/Ship database can reference a
different Catalog database.

chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.

change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.

change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For
example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need
updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.

change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.

class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.

classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.

codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.

commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.

Piping User's Guide 187

Glossary

commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).

component
Physical part that a feature generates.

concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of
a model.

consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set of
drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.

constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.

contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.

coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.

coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by
traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin
defined as 0,0,0.

critical flow
The state of flow for a given discharge at which the specific energy is minimum.

cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.

188 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

D
d/D
The maximum ratio of flow depth over pipe diameter.

damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a plant.

data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.

database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.

database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes since
the date that the last complete copy was created.

database break and recovery

Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.

database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another
design project.

database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.

database monitor record

Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.

degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree
1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.

design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or

Piping User's Guide 189

Glossary

customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so the user can
uniquely refer to the design alternatives.

design approval log

Record of review and approval of parts of the design.

design data auto input

Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.

design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.

design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.

design progress check

Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.

design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.

design service
Any general system services related to the design function.

design standard
Feature or object used in plant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way
of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to
computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.

detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.

distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).

distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.

190 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.

drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.

E
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.

edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.

edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.

element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.

equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.

exit elevation
The lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe.

F
fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.

face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.

fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.

Piping User's Guide 191

Glossary

feature
A logical collections of parts driven by the piping specification. There are four basic features:
straight, turn, branch, and inline component.

fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.

field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the
case that extra material is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and
construction process.

flat face
A flange surface on which the gasket sealing area is the entire surface from the inside face
diameter to the outside face diameter.

flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.

flow rate
The quantity of fluid flowing per unit of time.

flow time
The time it takes for the flow, from the head of the piped system, to reach a downstream point.

fluid flow analysis

Computational fluid dynamics.

focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.

full penetration weld

A type of weld where the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.

function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.

192 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

functional block diagram

Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.

furnishings
Parts, like movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).

G
gasket
A component used to seal a joint between two other components.

generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See
also specific and specific object.

GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a
replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.

H
handwheel
A wheel-shaped operator intended to be turned by hand to operate the valve stem or operator
shaft to which it is attached.

head loss
The loss of pressure due to friction or shape of a structure.

header
The portion of a pipeline topology associated with the primary fluid flow.

host location
The first Location created for a Site. This Host Location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.

Piping User's Guide 193

Glossary

host server
The database server where the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the
Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for
the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.

I
implied piping component
Piping components that are created in the database as part of a feature, but that are not
represented graphically.

initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant created
during its initial (concept) design period.

initial structural plan

Principal structural plan for the plant; also called a construction profile.

inline
A term used to refer to those piping components that can be inserted in a pipe feature.

instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.

interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the
model.

invert elevation
The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.

J
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.

194 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

K
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.

ksi
Kips per square inch.

L
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.

lever
A handle type operator.

library
Resource of reference information that a software user can access in developing a plant design.

life cycle database

Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants.

line
Maze of paths identifying connecting elements; synonymous with a network. Fluid comes in at
one point and exits through all other connected points. See also pipeline.

link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.

lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.

load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, if a pipe clamp from load group 5 has a maximum nominal load of 20 kN then so
does a threaded rod from load group 5.

location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and

Piping User's Guide 195

Glossary

created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Plants within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Plants are configured for
Workshare.

logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.

lug (hangers and supports)

A plate with a bolt hole usually welded to the centerline of a pipe. Used to connect the pipe to
the other parts of the hanger.

lug and eye piece lifting

Pads used to move structural assemblies.

M
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant.

macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware
programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.

maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.

maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.

material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.

material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.

methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
plant.

196 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

move from point

Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.

move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To
point determines where you want the move to stop.

MTO neutral file

A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.

N
network
Maze of paths identifying connecting elements; synonymous with line. Fluid enters at one point
and exits through all other connected points.

node
1) One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph. 2) A terminal of any branch of a network or a
terminal common to two or more branches of a network. 3) An end point of any branch or a
network or graph, or a junction common to two or more branches.

northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.

nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.

nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.

NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)

The diameter of a pipe.

Piping User's Guide 197

Glossary

O
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.

occurrence (of part or equipment)

Instantiation of a part of equipment in the plant that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its
complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the
case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the
catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence
of that object in the plant design.

occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on
the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.

option
A predefined alternative to the default part in the pipe specification. There can be more than one
option.

origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.

origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin
point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values.

orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.

orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular
to the plane.

oversized spool
A spool with dimensions greater than the maximum allowed dimensions. You can define the
maximum dimensions in the reference data.

198 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

P
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.

package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)

painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.

parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.

part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with
different dimensions.

part number
Unique identifier of a part.

part override
An option used to place a component not defined in the pipe specification.

part ports
An intelligent connection point on a support part. Ports are used to connect parts together in a
physically meaningful manner.

parts
The physical components that comprise a feature and are generally selected by the software.
For example, the flanges, gaskets, and the gate valve itself are examples of the parts
comprising the gate valve feature.

PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent computer-aided design and engineering application for the process,
power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond
to engineering tasks in the design workflow.

peak flow
The maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe.

Piping User's Guide 199

Glossary

penetration spool
A spool that can include parts from one or more pipeline systems. The common factor among
all the systems is that each pipeline is welded to a common penetration plate.

PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.

pipe
Piping part that is hollow and approximately cylindrical; may have a constant cross section along
its length. Pipe conveys a working media (fluid or gas).

pipe run
Type of interconnection where a single path through a portion of a piping system has a common
specification, common property values, and one start and one end point.

pipe specification
A collection of the allowed types of piping commodities and requirements that can be used in the
design of a piping system to which the specification applies. These commodities are also known
as specification parts. Each individual piping specification includes additional rules that
determine the types of parts that must be used in certain design circumstances as well as
suggestions for parts that could be used in other circumstances.

pipe stress analysis

Analysis routines that provide stress and deflection data for piping designs. Loading conditions
can be both static (thermal or displacement) and dynamic.

pipeline
A set of graphically connected pipe runs including all branches.

piping system
Type of distribution system that allocates and controls the dispersion of a working media (fluid or
gas) among functional devices. The piping system may be comprised of other piping systems,
parts, devices, pipelines, and pipe runs.

pneumatic test
A pressure test in which air is used to detect leaks in a component.

port
A connection point to a pipe or a component such as a valve.

200 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.

Product Data Management (PDM) System

Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.

product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)

production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant.

promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.

Q
query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.

R
raised face
The raised area of a flange face that is the gasket sealing surface between two mating flanges.

reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.

resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the plant.

Piping User's Guide 201

Glossary

route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.

run
Line or a portion of a line with no change in material properties or purpose.

S
saddle
The multi-curved shape that appears when a pipe section is connected to another pipe section.

satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server
is not used unless Workshare is activated.

schedule
A system for indicating the wall thickness of a pipe. The higher the schedule number, the thicker
the wall for a certain pipe size.

schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.

schema update utility

Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after users modify or add to the database structure.

site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants.

site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given plant site
within a Site database.

site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new plant site or hull for design development.

sketch and trace

User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D
mode.

202 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

sleeve
A part that connects two pipes or two ducts, for example. A sleeve can be used to prevent water
from leaking through a hole.

slope
The degree of incline, expressed as a ratio of the vertical rise to the horizontal run.

specific energy
Depth of flow plus velocity head.

specifications
Contracted requirements for the plant.

split
A feature that represents a break and a joint in the piping, for example, butt-weld, coupling,
flange set, union, and so forth.

spool
A prefabricated portion of a piping system that is an assembly of fittings, flanges, and pipe. A
spool does not include bolts, gaskets, valves, or instruments.

stem
A rod that transmits the motion from the operator to the closure element of the valve.

stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.

suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.

symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side
of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.

system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.

Piping User's Guide 203

Glossary

T
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).

target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.

tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.

trim
A common term that refers to the working parts of a valve and the associated materials.

trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the 'natural' geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.

trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.

turn
A feature that represents an angular change in direction of a pipe run; for example, an elbow or
an angle valve.

U
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.

user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.

204 Piping User's Guide

 Glossary

V
valve
A component used to control the flow of fluid contained in a pipeline.

version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a plant site.

vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.

viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership
or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored
representation of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current
scenario.

W
weight and CG analysis
Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete plant.

welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.

wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.

wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to a user to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.

work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.

Piping User's Guide 205

Glossary

work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.

working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.

workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.

workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.

workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.

Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.

206 Piping User's Guide

Index
coordinate system • 188
A Copy a pipe run • 64
abstract part • 185 Correlate new equipment for use in an
Active Template Library (ATL) • 185 integrated environment • 68
actuator • 185 Create a new pipe run • 56
angle • 185 Create a new pipe run from a P&ID run • 57
Appendix Create a Pipeline System • 28
Property Dialog Boxes • 149 Create a Piping System • 29
approval state • 185 Create penetration spools • 130
arrangement (accommodation) • 185 Create Penetration Spools • 130
arrangement (piping) • 185 Create spools • 125
attribute • 186 Creating Jacketed Pipelines • 34
axis • 186 critical flow • 188

B D
basic design • 186 d/D • 189
bill of material (BOM) • 186 damage records • 189
branch point • 186 data interchange • 189
bulkload • 186 database • 189
database backup • 189
C database break and recovery • 189
database copy • 189
catalog • 186
database management • 189
Catalog database • 187
Default Property Values Tab (Pipeline
chain • 187
System Properties Dialog Box) • 174
change history • 187
Defaults Tab (Route Pipe Settings Dialog
change management • 187
Box) • 76
change propagation • 187
Defining Isometric Remarks • 42
Change the flow direction of a pipe run • 66
Definition Tab • 151
Check Manufacturability Command • 133
degree • 189
Check objects for manufacturability • 136
Delete a branch • 92
Choose a working plane • 66
Delete a component • 92
class • 187
Delete a pipe run • 93
classification folder • 187
Delete a pipeline • 93
codelist • 187
Delete a split • 92
commodity code • 187
Delete a spool • 126
commodity item • 188
Delete a straight pipe • 92
Common Property Tabs • 149
Delete a tap • 120
Compare design basis with the model • 70
Delete a turn • 93
component • 188
Deleting Features • 91
concurrent access • 188
design alternative • 189
Configuration Tab • 150
design approval log • 190
Connection Properties Dialog Box • 154
design data auto input • 190
Connections Tab • 151
design documents • 190
consolidated tasks • 188
design object • 190
constraints • 188
design progress check • 190
contract • 188
design review • 190
Convert turn feature to an arc • 67
design standard • 190
coordinate • 188
detail schedule • 190

Piping User's Guide 207

Index

distributed systems • 190 General Tab (Pipe End Feature Properties

distribution systems • 190 Dialog Box) • 155
documentation • 191 General Tab (Pipe Run Properties Dialog
Documentation Comments • 15 Box) • 159
drawing tool • 191 General Tab (Pipe Split Feature Properties
Dialog Box) • 100
E General Tab (Pipe Straight Feature
Properties Dialog Box) • 163
easting • 191 General Tab (Pipe Surface Mount Feature
edge • 191 Properties Dialog Box) • 166
Edit branch properties • 89 General Tab (Pipe Weld Properties Dialog
Edit component properties • 111 Box) • 172
Edit part properties • 90 General Tab (Pipeline System Properties
Edit pipe run properties • 89 Dialog Box) • 173
Edit pipeline properties • 88 General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle
Edit split properties • 98 Properties Dialog Box) • 180
Edit spool properties • 125 General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Properties
Edit straight pipe properties • 89 Dialog Box) • 178
Edit tap properties • 120 General Tab (Reference 3D Pipe Run
Edit turn feature properties • 89 Properties Dialog Box) • 179
Edit weld properties • 99 General Tab (Reference 3D Pipeline
Editing Properties • 87 System Properties Dialog Box) • 184
element • 191 General Tab (Reference 3D Piping
equipment catalog • 191 Component Properties Dialog Box) • 181
exit elevation • 191 General Tab (Reference 3D Piping
Extend an existing arc pipe • 64 Instrument Properties Dialog Box) • 182
Extend an existing pipe run • 64 Generate Penetration Spools Dialog Box •
130
F Generate Spools • 125
fabricate • 191 generic specific • 193
face-to-face • 191 Group Pipe Parts • 143
fasteners • 191 Grouping pipe parts by control points • 144
feature • 192 Grouping pipe parts by query • 144
fence • 192 Grouping pipe parts by query and control
flat face • 192 points • 143
flavor • 192 GUIDs • 193
flow rate • 192
flow time • 192 H
fluid flow analysis • 192 handwheel • 193
focus of rotation • 192 header • 193
full penetration weld • 192 host location • 193
function points • 192 host server • 194
functional block diagram • 193
furnishings • 193
I
G implied piping component • 194
initial design • 194
gasket • 193 initial structural plan • 194
General Tab (Connection Properties Dialog inline • 194
Box) • 155 Insert a component • 107
General Tab (Pipe Component Feature Insert a component on a curved pipe • 107
Properties Dialog Box) • 112 Insert a component while routing • 108
Insert a feature break • 98

208 Piping User's Guide

 Index

Insert a piping specialty item • 108 Modeling Jacketed Piping • 33

Insert a surface mounted component • 109 Modify Slope Dialog Box • 79
Insert a takedown joint • 97 Move a branch • 84
Insert a tap • 119 Move a component • 111
Insert a welded split • 97 Move a feature break • 99
Insert an instrument • 108 Move a pipe end • 85
Insert Component • 103 Move a pipe run • 84
Insert multiple splits a specified distance Move a sockolet, weldolet, or latrolet • 84
apart • 98 Move a split • 99
Insert Split • 95 Move a straight pipe • 85
Insert Tap • 117 Move a tap • 119
Insert the default branch • 109 Move a turn • 86
Insert the default reducer • 110 move from point • 197
Insert the default turn • 109 Moving Pipe Features • 81
Insulation Specification Dialog Box • 80 MTO neutral file • 197
interference checking • 194
Interference Checking • 43 N
invert elevation • 194
Isometric Extraction • 43 network • 197
New Pipe Run Dialog Box • 70
node • 197
J northing • 197
Jacketed Piping • 33 Notes Tab • 151
job order • 194 nozzle • 197
nozzle standout • 197
K NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 197
kinematics analysis • 195
ksi • 195 O
occurrence (of part or equipment) • 198
L occurrence property • 198
Occurrence Tab • 152
leg length analysis • 195 Occurrence Tab (Spool Properties Dialog
lever • 195 Box) • 129
library • 195 option • 198
line • 195 Options Tab (Penetration Spool Generation
link • 195 Dialog Box) • 131
lintel • 195 Options Tab (Spool Generation Dialog Box)
load group • 195 • 127
location • 195 Options Tab (WBS Item Generation Dialog
logical member • 196 Box) • 145
lug (hangers and supports) • 196 origin • 198
origin point • 198
M orthogonal • 198
machinery • 196 Orthographic Drawing Production • 43
macro • 196 oversized spool • 198
maintenance envelope • 196
maintenance records • 196 P
Manually correlate multiple SmartMarine 3D P&ID • 199
pipe runs/pipelines with a P&ID pipe package • 199
run/pipeline • 69 painting • 199
material analysis • 196 parameter • 199
material list • 196 part class • 199
methods • 196

Piping User's Guide 209

Index

part number • 199 Product Data Management (PDM) System •

part override • 199 201
parts • 199 production planning • 201
PDS (Plant Design System) • 199 promotion • 201
peak flow • 199
penetration spool • 200 Q
Permission Groups and Routing • 24
PinPoint • 200 query select sets • 201
pipe • 200
Pipe Bolt Set Properties Dialog Box • 155 R
Pipe Component Feature Properties Dialog raised face • 201
Box • 112 Reference 3D Pipe Nozzle Properties
Pipe End Feature Properties Dialog Box • Dialog Box • 180
155 Reference 3D Pipe Properties Dialog Box •
Pipe Gasket Properties Dialog Box • 158 178
Pipe Part Properties Dialog Box • 158 Reference 3D Pipe Run Properties Dialog
pipe run • 200 Box • 179
Pipe Run Properties Dialog Box • 158 Reference 3D Pipeline System Properties
Pipe Split Feature Properties Dialog Box • Dialog Box • 184
99 Reference 3D Piping Component Properties
Pipe Straight Feature Properties Dialog Box Dialog Box • 180
• 163 Reference 3D Piping Instrument Properties
pipe stress analysis • 200 Dialog Box • 182
Pipe Supports • 42 Reference 3D Tab • 76
Pipe Surface Mount Feature Properties reference data • 201
Dialog Box • 166 Relationship Tab • 154
Pipe Tap Feature Properties Dialog Box • resource estimation • 201
120 Rotate a component • 112
Pipe Turn Feature Properties Dialog Box • Rotate a component on a nozzle • 112
168 route • 202
Pipe Weld Properties Dialog Box • 172 Route a branch at a specific angle • 62
pipeline • 200 Route a flexible pipe • 122
Pipeline System Properties Dialog Box • Route a flexible pipe from a P&ID run • 122
173 Route a multi-sloped pipe run • 60
Piping • 21 Route a pipe from R3D nozzle • 63
Piping Common Tasks • 27 Route a pipe run at specified distance • 61
Piping in the Integrated Environment • 29 Route a pipe run at specified distance and
piping system • 200 direction • 62
Piping Workflow • 27 Route a pipe run to a specific coordinate
Place a nozzle from a P&ID • 67 location • 61
Place a tee from a P&ID • 67, 110 Route a pipe run with an offset • 63
Place an elbolet • 110 Route a sloped pipe run • 59
Place components while routing pipes • 58 Route Flex Pipe • 121
Place splits while routing pipes • 59 Route Pipe • 45
Placing the Core Pipe and Components • Route pipe across P&ID off-page
37 connectors • 57
Placing the Jacket Pipe and Components • run • 202
38
pneumatic test • 200
port • 200
S
Preface • 9 saddle • 202
principle of superposition • 201 satellite server • 202
schedule • 202

210 Piping User's Guide

 Index

schema • 202 version control • 205

schema update utility • 202 viewset • 205
Select component settings • 111
Select Pipe Run Dialog Box • 79 W
Select pipe run settings • 66
Select System Dialog Box • 80 WBS Item Generation Dialog Box • 145
Sequence Objects • 139 weight and CG analysis • 205
Sequence weld names in a pipe run • 141 welding • 205
Sequence weld names in a pipeline • 141 What's New in Piping • 19
Sequence weld names in a spool • 141 wirebody • 205
Sequence Weld Names in a WBS Item • wizard • 205
141 work content • 205
Set Offset Reference Dialog Box • 77 work order • 206
site • 202 workset • 206
site setup • 202 workspace • 206
sketch and trace • 202 workspace document • 206
sleeve • 203 Workspace Explorer • 206
slope • 203
SmartMarine 3D and Oracle • 17
SmartMarine 3D Documentation Set • 11
specific energy • 203
specifications • 203
Specifications Tab (Pipeline System
Properties Dialog Box) • 174
Specify Slope Direction Dialog Box • 78
split • 203
spool • 203
Spool Generation Dialog Box • 126
Spool Properties Dialog Box • 129
Spooling • 123
Spooling Tab • 131
stud • 203
suspended floor • 203
symmetric node • 203
system • 203

T
tag number • 204
target point • 204
tolerant geometry • 204
Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 150
trimmed surface • 204
trunk • 204
turn • 204

U
unit/module modeler • 204
user attributes • 204

V
valve • 205

Piping User's Guide 211